DMC10 Distributed Multi-channel Controller1].pdf · Chapter 7. LOADER This chapter describes how to operate the Smart Loader Package SLP-D10 exclusively for the DMC10. Chapter 8

DMC10Distributed Multi-channel Controller

andSLP-D10 Smart Loader Package

User’s Manual

No. CP-UM-5143E

Thank you for purchasing the DMC10Distributed Multi-channel Controller.This manual describes the DMC10 andthe SLP-D10 Smart Loader Package.This manual contains information forensuring correct use of the DMC10. Italso provides necessary informationfor installation, maintenance, andtroubleshooting.This manual should be read by thosewho design and maintain devices thatuse the DMC10.Be sure to keep this manual nearby forhandy reference.

This product has been designed, developed and manufactured for general-purposeapplication in machinery and equipment.Accordingly, when used in applications outlined below, special care should be taken toimplement a fail-safe and/or redundant design concept as well as a periodicmaintenance program.

• Safety devices for plant worker protection• Start/stop control devices for transportation and material handling machines• Aeronautical/aerospace machines• Control devices for nuclear reactors

Never use this product in applications where human safety may be put at risk.

RESTRICTIONS ON USE

The DMCTM

is a trademark of Yamatake Corporation in Japan.

NOTICE

©2000 Yamatake Corporation ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Be sure that the user receives this manual before the product is used.

Copying or duplicating this user’s manual in part or in whole is forbid-den. The information and specifications in this manual are subject tochange without notice.

Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is freefrom inaccuracies and omissions. If you should find an error or omis-sion, please contact Yamatake Corporation.

In no event is Yamatake Corporation liable to anyone for any indirect,special or consequential damages as a result of using this product.

i

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About Icons

The safety precautions described in this manual are indicated by various icons.Please be sure you read and understand the icons and their meanings describedbelow before reading the rest of the manual.

Safety precautions are intended to ensure the safe and correct use of this prod-uct, to prevent injury to the operator and others, and to prevent damage to proper-ty. Be sure to observe these safety precautions.

Examples

Use caution when handling the product.

The indicated action is prohibited.

Be sure to follow the indicated instructions.

WARNINGWarnings are indicated when mishandling thisproduct might result in death or serious injury.

CAUTIONCautions are indicated when mishandling thisproduct might result in minor injury to the user, oronly physical damage to the product.

ii

CAUTIONBefore wiring or installing the DMC10, be sure to turn the power OFF.Failure to do so might cause faulty operation.

Do not remove or attach the DMC10 from or to the base while its power is ON. Doing so might cause faulty operation.

Do not disassemble the DMC10.Doing so might cause faulty operation.

Use the DMC10 within the operating ranges (temperature, humidity, vibration,shock, mounting direction, atmosphere, etc.) recommended in the specifications.Failure to do so might cause fire or faulty operation.

Do not block ventilation holes.Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation.

Wire the DMC10 properly according to predetermined standards.Also wire the DMC10 using designated power supply according to recognizedinstallation methods.Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty operation.

Do not allow lead clippings, chips or water to enter the DMC10 case.Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation.

Firmly tighten the terminal screws at the torque listed in the specifications.Insufficient tightening of terminal screws might cause fire.

Do not use unused terminals on the DMC10 as relay terminals.Doing so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty operation.

Use Yamatake Corporation’s SurgeNon if there is the risk of power surgescaused by lightning.Failure to do so might cause fire or faulty operation.

When disposing of the DMC10, dispose of it appropriately as industrial wastein accordance with local bylaws and regulations.

Use the relay on the DMC10 within the rated life described in thespecifications. Continued use of the DMC10 outside of the rated life mightcause fire or faulty operation.

The DMC10 will not function for about ten seconds after turning the powerON. Pay attention to this when using the relay output from the DMC10 as aninterlock signal.

Prevent the total power consumption of all linked modules from exceeding100W.

Do not supply power from two or more lines to all linked modules.Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation.

Do not short the control output section (at voltage pulse output). Doing somight activate the overcurrent protection circuit for the internal power supply,and reset the DMC10.

Unpacking

iii

Check the following when removing the SLP-D10 from its package:

1. Check the model No. to make sure that you have received the product that you ordered.

2. Check the SLP-D10 for any apparent physical damage.

3. Check the contents of the package against the Package List to make sure that all accessories are included

in the package.

After unpacking, handle the SLP-D10 and its accessories taking care to prevent damage or loss of parts.

If an inconsistency is found or the package contents are not in order, immediately contact your dealer.

Name Model No. Qt’y Remarks

CD-ROM1Smart Loader PackageSLP-D10 System disk

Special cable (1 set) –

1

1

User’s Manual CP-UM-5143

CP-UM-5143E

1

Japanese version

This manual.English version

User Registration Card Enter the required particulars inthe User Registration Card andreturn it to us immediately.Otherwise, you will not receivenotification of version upgradesand we will not be able to providethe necessary support inresponse to your inquiries.

1

SLP-D10J50

The Role of This Manual

iv

In all, 3 manuals have been prepared for the DMC10. Read the manual according to your specific requirements.

The following lists all the manuals that accompany the DMC10 and gives a brief outline of the manual. If you do

not have the required manual, contact Yamatake Corporation or your dealer.

User's Manual

CP-UM-0123E

WARNING

CAUTION

WARNING

CAUTION

User's Manual

CP-UM-0123E

WARNING

CAUTION

WARNING

CAUTION

DMC10E Distributed Multi-channel ControllerManual No.CP-UM-5131E

This manual is packaged with the DMC10E.

This manual describes only the precautions when using the DMC10E, itsspecifications and how to wire.

DMC10S/DMC10D Distributed Multi-channel Controller Manual No.CP-UM-5126E

This manual is packaged with the DMC10S or DMC10D.

This manual describes only the precautions when using the DMC10S andDMC10D, their specifications and how to wire.

DMC10D Distributed Multi-channel Controller and SLP-D10 Smart Loader Package

Manual No.CP-UM-5143E

This manual.

This manual is supplied with the Smart Loader Package SLP-D10 systemdisk.

This manual describes the product body and the exclusive SLP-D10.This manual describes an outline of the DMC10, how to install the DMC10for building it into instrumentation, how to wire, maintenance andinspection, how to remedy trouble that may occur, function specifications,how to install the Smart Loader Package SLP-D10, operations on thepersonal computer, each of the functions and how to setup.

Organization of This User’s Manual

v

This manual is organized as follows:

Chapter 1. INTRODUCTIONThis chapter describes a brief outline of the DMC10 and the product modelnumbers.

Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTSThis chapter describes the names and functions of parts on the DMC10.

Chapter 3. INSTALLATION

This chapter describes installation sites for the DMC10 and how to installthe DMC10.

Chapter 4. WIRINGThis chapter describes how to wire the DMC10, how to connect the powersupply and how to connect for RS-485 communications.

Chapter 5. DEVICE CONNECTIONS & CONFIGURATIONThis chapter describes the configuration of the DMC10 system and theproduct model numbers.

Chapter 6. SETUP & OPERATIONSThis chapter describes overall operation methods for running the DMC10.

Chapter 7. LOADERThis chapter describes how to operate the Smart Loader Package SLP-D10 exclusively for the DMC10.

Chapter 8. SETUP PARAMETERS (Common to DMC10S and DMC10D)This chapter lists setup parameter tables and describes each function indetail.

Chapter 9. SETUP PARAMETERS (DMC10D)This chapter describes additional setup parameters relating to theDMC10D only in detail.

Chapter 10. COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONSThis chapter describes how to communicate with a personal computer,PLC or other host devices.

Chapter 11. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONSThis chapter describes how to communicate with a personal computer,PLC or other host devices through MODBUS communications.

Chapter 12. ADJUSTMENT & ZENER BARRIER ADJUSTMENTThis chapter describes how to adjust the DMC10 and the adjustmentprocedure.

Chapter 13. TROUBLESHOOTINGThis chapter describes how to find the cause of trouble that occurs whenusing the DMC10 and how to remedy trouble.

Chapter 14. SPECIFICATIONSThis chapter describes the general specifications, performancespecifications and external dimensions of the DMC10.

AppendixThis appendix provides advice for methods of use.

vi

Contents

SAFETY PRECAUTIONSUnpackingThe Role of This ManualOrganization of This User’s ManualConventions Used in This Manual

Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION Features.......................................................................................................1-1 Model Selection Guide ...............................................................................1-2

Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS Body.............................................................................................................2-1 Base .............................................................................................................2-2

Chapter 3. INSTALLATION Mounting Locations....................................................................................3-1 Linking Modules .........................................................................................3-1 Installation Procedure ................................................................................3-1 Mounting the Body on the Base................................................................3-2

Chapter 4. WIRING Wiring...........................................................................................................4-1 Wiring Precautions .....................................................................................4-4 Connecting the Power Supply...................................................................4-6 Connecting for CPL Communications......................................................4-6 Connecting to the SSR...............................................................................4-7

Chapter 5. DEVICE CONNECTIONS & CONFIGURATION Number of Connected Units ......................................................................5-1 Setting the Device Address .......................................................................5-2 Configuration When Combined With the CMC10 ....................................5-3 Layout of Event Output Module DMC10E.................................................5-4

Chapter 6. SETUP & OPERATIONS Overall Operation Procedure.....................................................................6-1 Setup Method..............................................................................................6-1

Chapter 7. LOADER7-1 Introduction......................................................................................................7-1

Loader Functions........................................................................................7-1 System Operating Environment ................................................................7-2

7-2 Installing, Starting up and Quitting the Software Package..........................7-3 Installation...................................................................................................7-3 Device Driver Installation for USB Loader Cable.....................................7-6 Starting Up SLP-D10.................................................................................7-10

vii

Quitting SLP-D10 ......................................................................................7-107-3 Setup Function...............................................................................................7-11

Outline of Setup Function........................................................................7-11 Screen Explanations ................................................................................7-11 Operation Procedure ................................................................................7-13

7-4 Monitor Function ...........................................................................................7-17 Outline .......................................................................................................7-17 Screen Explanations ................................................................................7-18 How to Operate the Numeric Monitor Screen ........................................7-19 How to Operate the Trend Monitor..........................................................7-21

Chapter 8. SETUP PARAMETERS (Common to DMC10S and DMC10D)8-1 List of Setup Parameters ................................................................................8-1

Basic Functions ..........................................................................................8-1 Option Functions ........................................................................................8-3

8-2 Explanation of Basic Functions .....................................................................8-5 PV Input .......................................................................................................8-5 Control Output ............................................................................................8-8 SP and Control Parameters .....................................................................8-12 Communications.......................................................................................8-13 Other ..........................................................................................................8-14

8-3 Detailed Explanation of Option Functions ..................................................8-16 Event Output .............................................................................................8-16 Current Transformer Input.......................................................................8-25 External Switch Input ...............................................................................8-26 Auxiliary Output (current output)............................................................8-29

8-4 Event Output Special Operation...................................................................8-30 Setup Parameters (only for event output special operation) ...............8-30 Detailed Explanation ................................................................................8-31

8-5 External Switch Input Special Operation.....................................................8-33 Setup Parameters (only external switch input special operations) .....8-33 Detailed Explanation ................................................................................8-33

Chapter 9. SETUP PARAMETERS (DMC10D)9-1 Outline of the Advanced Functions ...............................................................9-1

PV Input .......................................................................................................9-1 Control Output ............................................................................................9-1

9-2 Detailed Explanation of Basic Functions ......................................................9-3 Heat/Cool Output Assignments.................................................................9-3 Inter-channel Deviation Control ................................................................9-4 Control by Remote SP................................................................................9-5 Position Proportional Control ...................................................................9-6 Time Proportional Power Saving Mode ..................................................9-11 MV Branch Control ...................................................................................9-14

Chapter 10. COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS10-1 Outline of Communications..........................................................................10-1

viii

Features.....................................................................................................10-1 Defaults......................................................................................................10-1 Communications Procedures..................................................................10-2

10-2 Message Structure.........................................................................................10-3 Message Structure....................................................................................10-3 Data Link Layer .........................................................................................10-3 Application Layer......................................................................................10-5

10-3 Description of Commands ............................................................................10-6 Read Continuous Data Command (RS command) ................................10-6 Write Continuous Data Command (WS command) ...............................10-7 Read Continuous Fixed Length Data Command (RD command).........10-8 Write Continuous Fixed Length Data Command (WD command)........10-9 Read Fixed Length Random Data Command (RU command) ............10-10 Write Fixed Length Random Data Command (WU command) ...........10-11

10-4 Definition of Word Addresses ....................................................................10-1210-5 How Numerical Values Are Expressed in the Application Layer ............10-1310-6 List of Status Codes ....................................................................................10-1410-7 Reception and Transmission Timing.........................................................10-15

Timing Specifications for Instruction and Response Message .........10-15 RS-485 Driver Control Timing Specifications ......................................10-15

10-8 List of All Communications Parameters (in RAM address order) ...........10-16 Word Address Data ................................................................................10-16 Bit Information Data ...............................................................................10-30

10-9 Detail Explanation on Communication Conditions ..................................10-39 Write Conditions .....................................................................................10-39 Write Range.............................................................................................10-40 Constant Write Inhibit ............................................................................10-41

10-10 Cautions When Making Communications Programs for the Master Station ...10-42

Chapter 11. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS11-1 Outline of Communications..........................................................................11-1

Features.....................................................................................................11-1 Initial Setting .............................................................................................11-1 Communications Procedures..................................................................11-1

11-2 Message Structure.........................................................................................11-2 Message Structure....................................................................................11-2 Transmission Message ............................................................................11-4 Response Time .........................................................................................11-4 Other Specifications.................................................................................11-4

11-3 Description of Commands ............................................................................11-5 RTU Encoding ...........................................................................................11-5 ASCII Encoding.........................................................................................11-6

Chapter 12. ADJUSTMENT & ZENER BARRIER ADJUSTMENT Precautions before Adjustment ..............................................................12-1 Measurement Equipment Required for Adjustment..............................12-1 Adjustment Procedure .............................................................................12-1 About Zener Barrier Adjustment .............................................................12-5

ix

Chapter 13. TROUBLESHOOTING How to Use the LEDs on the Front Panel When Checking Alarms......13-1 PV Input Related Trouble .........................................................................13-2 Body Alarms Related Trouble .................................................................13-2 Loader Communications Related Trouble .............................................13-3 Host Communications Related Trouble .................................................13-3 Control Related Trouble...........................................................................13-4

Chapter 14. SPECIFICATIONS14-1 General Specifications ..................................................................................14-1

Environmental Conditions .......................................................................14-114-2 Performance Specifications .........................................................................14-2

PV Input .....................................................................................................14-2 Isolation Between Inputs and Outputs ...................................................14-6 External Dimensions ................................................................................14-6

Appendix1. Advice on Control Constants ........................................................................App.-1

ON/OFF Control ....................................................................................App.-1 Control by Self-tuning ..........................................................................App.-1 Control by PID Fixed Values................................................................App.-2

2. Advice on Events ............................................................................................App.-33. Event Output Special Operation....................................................................App.-5

Internal Structure of Event Output Special Operation ......................App.-5 Block Diagram of Output Special Operation......................................App.-6 Operating Procedures for Event Output Special Operation .............App.-7

4. External Switch Input Special Operation....................................................App.-10 Internal Structure of External Switch Input Special

Operation.............................................................................................App.-10 Operating Procedures for RSW Input Special Operation ...............App.-12 Sample Applications Combining the Event Output Special ...........App.-14

Operation and the RSW Special Operation5. Settings When Heat/Cool Control Is Used..................................................App.-15

Setting Procedures.............................................................................App.-156. Settings When Remote SP Is Used .............................................................App.-16

Setting Procedures.............................................................................App.-167. Settings When Inter-Channel Deviation Control Is Used ..........................App.-17

Setting Procedures.............................................................................App.-17

x

Conventions Used in This Manual

The following conventions are used in this manual:

Handling Precautions: Handling Precautions indicate items that the user should pay attention

to when handling the DMC10.

Note : Notes indicate useful information that the user might benefit byknowing.

(1), (2), (3) : The numbers with the parenthesis indicate steps in a sequence orindicate corresponding parts in an explanation.

[Open] button : Indicates a selection button in screens displayed on the personalcomputer.

: Indicates icon buttons displayed on the personal computer.

[SLP-D10.exe], : Indicate messages and menus displayed on the personal computer. [Printing],[Open file]

: Indicates the result of an operation, details displayed on the personalcomputer or devices, or the state of a device after an operation.

[Tab] key, [F4] key : Indicates keys on the keyboard.

[Ctrl] + [T] key : Indicates the operation of pressing the [T] key with the [Ctrl] key on thekeyboard held down.

– (minus) to + (plus) : This manual expresses numerical value ranges using – (minus) and +(plus), for example as –10 to +100, when expressing a range startingwith a minus value.

Ranges are not expressed using a + (plus) when the range starts froma plus value for example as 0 to 1000.

Data specified in transmission and reception in communications neednot be prefixed with + (plus). An error occurs if data is prefixed with the+ (plus) symbol.

Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION

Features• This modular is provided with 2-loop or 4-loop control functions on each single

unit.

• Input types are thermocouples (K, J, E, T, R, S, DIN U, DIN L), resistance

temperature detector (Pt100, JPt100), current signals (4 to 20mAdc), and voltage

signals (0 to 1Vdc, 0 to 5Vdc, 1 to 5Vdc). Each of these input types can be

designated to each channel. This allows different inputs to be combined on a

single controller.

Each of the channels is isolated, eliminating worry of trouble caused by

rerouting circuits.

• Control output types are relay and voltage pulse, and control types are ON/OFF

control, self-tuning control and control by fixed PID.

• Optional functions for the 2-channel model include current transformer input

used for the heater line break alarm; upper/lower limit alarm or heater line break

alarm; event output that can be used as a delay timer; RUN/READY or

AUTO/MANUAL mode switching; external switch input that can be used as a

function for switching four setting values; and current output (AUX) that

enables input of PV value trends to a recorder. Select the option to suit your

particular control requirements. (Optional functions cannot be added on to 4-

channel models.)

• Use of the event output module (sold separately) enables use of event output

even on 4-channel modules.

• Connection of the link connector on the side of the DMC10 and relay terminals

provided on the base enable connection to up to 15 modules.

• The DMC10 has not display or setup unit. This allows it to be designed in a

compact size (30mm (W) x 100mm (H) x 110mm (D)).

• The DMC10 can be mounted on DIN rail or screw-mounted on walls. This

facilitates mounting on panels or instrumentation.

• The DMC10 Smart Loader Package (sold separately) is supported on PC/AT

compatible personal computers (Windows OS).

• Parameters can be read and written easily on the DMC10 Smart Loader Package

(sold separately).

In addition to setting the table format, operations while the DMC10 is running

and monitoring of the control state on the trend screen are possible. This enables

operation of the DMC10 without the need for a program on the host device.

• With the advanced function model DMC10D, heat/cool control, inter-channel

deviation control, remote SP input, position proportional control and power

saving functions can also be used in addition to the above functions.

• The DMC10 conforms to IEC directives, and has acquired CE marking.

(applicable standard: EN61010-1, EN50081-2, EN50082-2)

When the CE standard is to be acquired on the instrumentation, use a third-party

24Vdc power supply that has CE marking.

1-1

1-2

Model Selection Guide

Configuration of DMC10S, DMC10D model numbers

Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION

*1: When the standard model is selected, you cannot select options “05” and “06”.*2: When 2-channel input is selected, option “00” cannot be selected.*3: When 4-channel input is selected, option “00” is fixed.

List of DMC10 related products

List of CMC10 related products

*: Connect this terminating resistor to both of the units that are at either end of theCC-Link. However, please note that the specifications of the terminating resistorvary depending on the cable used for the CC-Link. For more information on theterminating resistor, refer to:• Mitsubishi Electric CC-Link System Master Local Unit User’s Manual

(currently being revised)

• Mitsubishi Sequencer Technical News (No.PLC-D-330).

BasicModel No.DMC10SDMC10D

Number ofChannels

24

WiringMethod

TC

ControlOutput

RV

Options

00010203040506

AdditionalProcessing

00D0Y0

Specifications

Standard model *1Advanced function model 2-channel input *24-channel input *3Terminal wiringConnector wiringRelay outputVoltage pulse output (for SSR drive)None2 CT inputs, 4 event relay outputs2 CT inputs, 4 external switch inputs2 AUX outputs, 4 event relay outputs2 AUX outputs, 4 external switch inputs2 CT inputs, 2 event relay outputs, 2 event voltage outputs2 CT inputs, 2 external switch inputs, 2 event voltage outputsNoneInspection Certificate providedComplying with the traceability certification

Model No.DMC10E4CR0000SLP-D10J5081440792-001

SDU10T0100

SpecificationsEvent output module (4-channel relay output)Smart Loader package for DMC10 (including special cable)Connector set (pack of 4, MSTB2, 5/5-STF-5, 08AU made byPhoenix Contact)For Distributed Multi-Channel Controller DMC10

Model No.CMC10ACL1A000CMC10BCP1A000CMC10G

CMC10L001A000SLP-CM1E2081446717-001 *81446717-002 *81446748-00181440792-001

SpecificationsCommunications Controller CC-Link/CPL converterCommunications Controller CPL/CPL ConverterCommunication Controller(PLC/Controller Converter)RS-232C/RS-485 converterSmart Loader package for CMC10B (including special cable)Terminating resister (110Ω, 2 p’ces) for CMC10ATerminating resister (130Ω, 2 p’ces) for CMC10AAC adapter for CMC10LConnector set (pack of 4, MSTB2, 5/5-STF-5, 08AU made byPhoenix Contact)

Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS

Body

DMC10S, DMC10D

2-1

Rotary switch for device address:Sets the address used for host communications.

0: Communications disabled (factory setting)

1 to F: Communications enabled

Loader jack:Used for connecting the special cable packaged with the DMC10 Smart Loader Package SLP-D10J20 for performing setup and monitoring on the Loader.

POWER lamp:Lights when power is being supplied (factory setting). Blinks for approx. 10 seconds for initialization after the power is turned ON.Communications is not possible during initialization.Various states can be monitored according to the lamp setting.

DMC10E

EV1 to EV4 operation lamps:Light when the relay contact of the target channel inside the module turns ON.

NoteThe compatible connector for the DMC10S and DMC10D connector wiring

models and the DMC10E is part No. 81440792-001 (4 pc’s/set).

This is an equivalent product of MSTB2, 5/5-STF-5, 08AU made by Phoenix

Contact.

2-2

Base

Mounting holes (2 locations):For securing the base with M3 screws

Communications disconnection switch:Used for disabling CPL communications with devices linked on the left side(factory setting: CONNECT )(linked state)

DIN rail locking tab:Used for locking on a DIN rail

Mounting hole

Lever:For securing the body

CPL communications terminal:3-lead RS-485 connector terminal

Side connector

Power supply terminal

Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS


3-1

CAUTIONUse the DMC10 within the operating ranges (temperature, humidity, vibration,shock, mounting direction, atmosphere, etc.) recommended in thespecifications.Failure to do so might cause fire or faulty operation.

Do not block ventilation holes.Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation.

Mounting LocationsAvoid installing the DMC10 in the following locations:

• Locations subject to low and high temperature and humidity exceeding the

specified ranges

• Locations subject to corrosive gases such as sulfide gases

• Locations subject to dust or oil smoke

• Locations subject to direct sunlight, wind or rain

• Locations subject to vibration or shock exceeding the specified ranges

• Locations under high-voltage lines and near sources of electrical noise such as

welders

• Locations within 15 meters of high-voltage ignition equipment such as boilers

• Locations where magnetic fields are generated

• Locations near flammable liquid or steam

Linking ModulesThe DMC10 can be linked with other modules by the connectors on the left and

right of the base. Modules must be linked before the DMC10 is mounted on the

DIN rail or mounted by screws. By linking modules together, the power supply of

each module and CPL communications are connected, eliminating the need for

wiring. CPL communications can be disconnected by the communications

disconnection switch on the base.

Installation ProcedureThe DMC10 can be mounted in either of two ways, by mounting its base by

screws or by securing on a DIN rail.

Mount each DMC10 module vertically as in the figure below.

Handling Precautions• Mount the DMC10 modules in the same horizontal plane. Deviation

from the horizontal should not exceed the amount stated in thespecifications.

powerSD

CMC10

11

12

13

14

15

LOADER

power

SD

RD

SD

RD

HO

ST CM

CC

MC

L OC

A L

CM

C A D

DR

E S S

12

0

345

678

9

12

0

345

678

9

12

0

HOST CMCB.RATE

ERR

RESET

CMC10

11

12

13

14

15

LDR

PWR

0

4

C

8

DMC10

ADR

CH3

21

22

23

24

25

CH1

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

21

22

23

24

25

CH4 CH2

LDR

PWR

0

4

C

8

DMC10

ADR

CH3

21

22

23

24

25

CH1

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

21

22

23

24

25

CH4 CH2

LDR

PWR0

4

C

8ADR

Top

Front

3-2

Do not mount as shown below.

When mounting the base by screwsSecure the two mounting holes on the base by M3 screws.

(30)

5 10–0.2

30+0.9+0.3

578

.5–0

.2

(100

)

M3


When securing on a DIN railSecure the DMC10 on the DIN rail, fully draw out the DIN rail locking tab and

hook the base onto the DIN rail. Next, push the DIN rail locking tab upwards until

you hear it click into place.

Mounting the Body on the BaseFit the hook into the base and push the body into the base until you until you hear

it click into place. To remove the body from the base, pull the body towards you

while pressing down the lever.

Hook

Lever

Unit: mm

power

SD

CM

C10

1112131415

LOA

DE

R

power

SD

RD

SD

RD

HOST CMCCMC LOCAL

CMC ADDRESS

12

0

3456

78

912

0

3456

78

912

0

HO

ST C

MC

B.R

ATE

ER

R

RE

SE

T

CM

C10

1112131415

LDR

PW

R

0

4C

8

DM

C10

AD

R

CH

3

2122232425

CH

1

1617181920

2122232425

2122232425

CH

4C

H2

LDR

PW

R

0

4C

8

DM

C10

AD

R

CH

3

2122232425

CH

1

1617181920

2122232425

2122232425

CH

4C

H2

LDR

PW

R0

4C

8A

DR

power SD

CMC10

11

12

13

14

15

LOADER

power

SD

RD

SD

RD

HO

ST

CM

CC

MC

LO

CAL

CM

C A

DD

RES

S

12

0

345

67 8

9

12

0

345

67 8

9

12

0

HOST CMCB.RATE

ERR

RESET

CMC10

11

12

13

14

15

LDR

PWR

0

4

C

8

DMC10

ADR

CH3

21

22

23

24

25

CH1

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

21

22

23

24

25

CH4CH2

LDR

PWR

0

4

C

8

DMC10

ADR

CH3

21

22

23

24

25

CH1

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

21

22

23

24

25

CH4CH2

LDR

PWR0

4

C

8 ADR

Top

Front

Top

Front

21

AUX output (CH1)

22

26

AUX output (CH2)

27

21

CT input (CH1)

22CT

Event 3

Event 4

Event 3

Event 4

23

Event relay output(CH1/2)

24

25

Event 1

Event 223

External switch input(CH1/2)

24

25

RSW1

RSW2

26

CT input (CH2)

27CT

28

Event relay output(CH3/4)

29

30

28

Event voltage output(CH3/4)

29

30

+-

AUX1

EV1,2

AUX2

EV3,4

CT1

RSW1,2

CT2

RSW3,4

28

External switch input(CH3/4)

29

30

RSW3

RSW4

+-

++

-

11

Relay output (CH1)

12

11

Voltage output (CH1)

12

16

Relay output (CH2)

17

16


17

13

Thermocouple input (CH1)

14

15

13

RTD input (CH1)

14

15 A

B

C 13

DC voltage/DC current input (CH1)


14

15

mA

V

18

19

20

mA

V

18

RTD input (CH2)

19

20 A

B

C18


19

20

Note: The terminal numbers are the same on the connector model.

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

ADR 8

C

0

PWR

LDR

DMC10

OUT1

PV1

OUT2

PV2

+-

+-

+-

+-

+

+

-

+

+-

Chapter 4. WIRING

Wiring

2-channel model

CAUTIONBefore wiring or installing the DMC10, be sure to turn the power OFF.Failure to do so might cause faulty operation.

Wire the DMC10 properly according to predetermined standards. Also wirethe DMC10 using designated power supply according to recognizedinstallation methods.Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty operation.

Firmly tighten the terminal screws at the torque listed in the specifications.Insufficient tightening of terminal screws might cause fire.

Do not use unused terminals on the DMC10 as relay terminals.Doing so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty operation.

4-1

11

Relay output (CH1)

12

11


12

16

17

16

17

13


Relay output (CH2)


14

15

13

RTD input (CH1)


RTD input (CH2)

14

15 A

B

C 13



14

15

mA

V

18

19

20

mA

V

18

19

20 A

B

C18

19

20

Note: The terminal numbers are the same on the connector model.

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

ADR 8

C

0

4

PWR

LDR

DMC10

OUT1

PV1

OUT2

PV2

+

+-

+

+-

+-

+-

+

-

+

-

24

Relay output (CH3)

Relay output (CH4)

25

24



25

26


27

28

29

30

29

30

21


22

23

21

RTD input (CH3)

RTD input (CH4)

22

23 C

B

A 21



22

23mA

V

26

27

28mA

V26

27

28 C

B

A

PV3

OUT3

PV4

OUT4

+

+-

+

+-

+

-

+

-

+-

+-

4-channel model

4-2

Heat/cool model (2-channel model)In the heat/cool control, it is necessary to set up the outputs of each loop. The

settings vary according to the model. There is no heat/cool model among the 4-

channel models.

The relationship between the settings and the output specifications is shown

below.

The settings shown below become effective only after collectively being written

by the loader.

Note: The Xs in the numbers of the available models indicate that any applicable

functional code is acceptable.

Chapter 4. WIRING

Setting Operating CH1 CH2 Available models Remarksterminal type output port output port

0 Heat: Relay OUT1 OUT2 • DMC10D2XR01X0 -Cool: Relay EV3 EV4 • DMC10D2XR03X0

1 Heat: Voltage OUT1 OUT2 • DMC10D2XV01X0 -Cool: Relay EV3 EV4 • DMC10D2XV03X0

2 Heat: Relay EV3 EV4 • DMC10D2XV01X0 -Cool: Voltage OUT1 OUT2 • DMC10D2XV03X0

3 Heat: Voltage EV3 EV4 • DMC10D2XR05X0 -Cool: Relay OUT1 OUT2 • DMC10D2XR06X0

4 Heat: Relay OUT1 OUT2 • DMC10D2XR05X0 -Cool: Voltage EV3 EV4 • DMC10D2XR05X0

5 Heat: Voltage OUT1 OUT2 • DMC10D2XV05X0 -Cool: Voltage EV3 EV4 • DMC10D2XV06X0

6 Heat: Relay OUT1 OUT2 • DMC10D2XR03X0 -Cool: Current AUX1 AUX2 • DMC10D2XR04X0

7 Heat: Current AUX1 AUX2 • DMC10D2XR03X0 -Cool: Relay OUT1 OUT2 • DMC10D2XR04X0

8 Heat: Voltage OUT1 OUT2 • DMC10D2XV03X0 -Cool: Current AUX1 AUX2 • DMC10D2XV04X0

9 Heat: Current AUX1 AUX2 • DMC10D2XV03X0 -Cool: Voltage OUT1 OUT2 • DMC10D2XV04X0

10 Heat: Current AUX1 – • DMC10D2XX03X0 One-loop Cool: Current AUX2 – • DMC10D2XX04X0 control only

AUX1

AUX2

EV3,4

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

ADR 8

C

0

4

PWR

LDR

DMC10

OUT1

PV1

OUT2

PV2

4-3

Position proportional model (2-channel model)The position proportional control function allows you to use the DMC10 as a

position proportional controller for one channel or two channels.

The output terminal assignment shown below becomes effective only after

collectively being written by the loader.



Handling Precautions• Make sure to use the auxiliary relay for driving the motor.• When the DMC10 is set so that the position proportional control is

used with feedback, the PV input channel is used for feedback input.(See above.)

• Connect the motor as follows:• When the position proportional channel 2 is not used, it is also

allowed to use EV3 and EV4 as the normal EVENT terminals bychanging the event special output operation (assignment of outputterminals).

• When the position proportional channel 2 is not used, it is alsoallowed to select the model number DMC10D2XRXXX.

• It is not allowed to change the feedback input channel.

Position proportional model (4-channel model)



Chapter 4. WIRING

Available models Position proportional PV Feedback OPEN CLOSE RemarksCH No. input

DMC10D2XRXXX CH1 PV1 PV2 OUT1 OUT2 With CH2 – – – – feedback

DMC10D2XR01X CH1 PV1 – OUT1 OUT2 WithoutDMC10D2XR03X CH2 PV2 – EV3 EV4 feedback

EV3,4

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

ADR 8

C

0

4

PWR

LDR

DMC10

OUT1

PV1

OUT2

PV2

A

B

C

Y

T

G

Motor DMC

PV input

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

ADR 8

C

0

4

PWR

LDR

DMC10

OUT1

PV1

OUT2

PV2

PV3

OUT3

PV4

OUT4

Available models Position proportional PV Feedback OPEN CLOSE Remarkscontrol CH No. input

DMC10D4XRXXX CH1 PV1 PV3 OUT1 OUT3 With CH2 PV2 PV4 OUT2 OUT4 feedback

DMC10D4XRXXX CH1 PV1 – OUT1 OUT3 WithoutCH2 PV2 – OUT2 OUT4 feedback

4-4

DMC10E

Chapter 4. WIRING

Wiring Precautions

CAUTIONThe DMC10 will not function for about ten seconds after turning the powerON. Pay attention to this when using the relay output from the DMC10 as aninterlock signal.

• Check the model number of the controller and terminal numbers on the label on

the side of the controller to prevent any wiring errors.

• Use crimped terminals for M3.5 screws to connect terminals.

• Prevent crimped terminals from coming into contact with adjacent terminals.

• I/O signal lines should be routed at least 50cm away from power lines. Also, do

not route I/O leads through the same distribution box or ducts.

• Before connecting in parallel to other equipment, thoroughly check the

conditions of the other equipment.

• Pass a lead wire for carrying the heater current through a current transformer.

Do not use a heater current that exceeds the allowable current described in the

specifications. Doing so might damage the DMC10.

• The controller is designed not to function for ten seconds after the controller is

turned ON. This is to allow it to stabilize. The controller then enters the Run

mode. However, allow at least 30 minutes for the controller to warm up so that

the specified accuracy is satisfied.

• When wiring is finished, check the connections for any miswiring before turning

the power ON.

14

Extended event (CH2)

15

11


12

13

NO

NC

16


17

18

NO

NC

19


20

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

NO: Normally Open (open)NC: Normally Close (close)

7mm

4-5

Wiring connectors (81440792-001: sold separately)• Specifications of cable used

Lead type: Single lead or twisted

Lead size: 0.2 to 2.5mm2 (AWG28 to 12)

Ideal exposed lead length: 7mm

Chapter 4. WIRING

• Screw tightening torque

Connector terminal: 0.5 to 0.6 N·m

Connector mount: 0.5 to 0.6 N·m

• Specifications of recommended screwdriver

We recommend using a screwdriver matched to the connector screw to

firmly fasten the cable.

Manufacturer: Phoenix Contact

Model No.: SZS0.6 x 3.5

Note• Crimped terminal

Generally, use a sleeve for the crimped terminal to mark each of the cables.

The following shows crimped terminals matched to this connector for

reference purposes.

Manufacturer: J.S.T Mfg Co., Ltd.

Model No.: VTUB-1.25

(pack of 1000, w/ insulated covering, lead size: 0.25 to

1.65mm2)

VTUB-2

(pack of 1000, w/ insulated covering, lead size: 1.04 to

2.63mm2)

TUB-1.25

(pack of 1000, w/out insulated covering, lead size: 0.25 to

1.65mm2)

TUB-2

(pack of 1000, w/out insulated covering, lead size: 1.04 to

2.63mm2)

4-6

Connecting the Power Supply

1 2 3

+ –24Vdc

Do not use

No. Signal 1 24Vdc (+) 2 24Vdc (–) 3 Do not use

Chapter 4. WIRING

CAUTIONPrevent the total power consumption of all linked modules from exceeding100W.

Connect the power terminal as follows:

Power is mutually connected between linked modules.

Supply power to one of the linked modules.

The power supply unit must be a UL approved Class 2 power supply unit or Class

2 transformer in order to apply UL.

Handling PrecautionsSelect a power supply that can cover the total power consumption of alllinked modules.

No. Signal 4 DA 5 DB 6 SG

Connecting for CPL CommunicationsCPL communications (RS-485) is performed using a 3-lead connection.

Connect to one of the linked modules for communications.

Handling Precautions• Do not connect an external terminating resistor as the DMC10 has a

built-in resistor equivalent to a terminator.

• Do not connect a terminating resistor when setting an SDC series, DCPseries or SRF series product (made by Yamatake Corporation) to thesame communications line.

• Be sure to connect SG terminals each other.Failure to do so might cause unstable communications.

Remarks

4-7

Connecting to the SSRUp to 3 DMC10s can be connected in series to the main SSR.

Note, however, that connection is subject to conditions.

• When connecting to a PGM (made by Yamatake Corporation)

PGM

+

–

+

–

DMC10

• • • •

V: 13V±5%

R1:150Ω±5%

R2:260Ω

VF:1.2V

PGMR2R2

VF VF

R1V

X R2+VF(V–2 X VF)

R1+2 X R2Voltage between PGM terminals =

≈ 5.3V

Allowable voltage between PGM terminals:In the above connection, operation is possible within 3 to 6V.

+

–

Chapter 4. WIRING

The following shows an example of how to calculate when the DMC10 isconnected to two units of the PGM (made by Yamatake Corporation):

PGM

SSR

+ +

– –Voltage output

510DMC10

How to connect to one PGM (made by Yamatake Corporation)

PGM

SSR

+

–

+

–Voltage output

DMC10

PGM

SSR• • • •

How to connect to two or more PGMs (made by Yamatake Corporation)

+

–

Number ofSSR Units

1

2

3

Connection Conditions

External resistors of510Ω (consumptioncurrent 1/2W or more)are required in series.

Series connection

Series connection

4-8

• When connecting to a PGM10N/F (made by Yamatake Corporation))

The following shows an example of how to calculate when the DMC10 isconnected to the PGM10N015 (made by Yamatake Corporation):

• Max. input current of SSR ≤ Allowable max. current of voltage pulseoutput. This relation must be satisfied.Since the input current is 10mA or less, 10mA X 3 units = 30mA.

This is less than the allowable max. current 30mA of voltage pulse output.

Therefore, 3 units can be driven.

• The input voltage range of SSR must be within the range of voltagebetween terminals of voltage pulse output.13V ± 5% (voltage between terminals of output) - 150Ω ± 5% (internal

resistance) X 30mA (driving current for 3 units) ≈ 7.5 to 9.5V.

This is within the input voltage range 3.5 to 30V of SSR.

Therefore, 3 units can be driven.

• When connecting to a G3PA (made by Omron Corporation)

Chapter 4. WIRING

LoadSSR

Voltageoutput

DMC10 200VacG3PA G3PA

SSR

How to connect to two or more G3PA(made by Omron Corporation)

Load

200Vac

• • • •+

–

+

–

+

–

RemarksNumber ofSSR Units

1

2

3


Parallel connection

Parallel connection

SSRVoltage output

DMC10

SSR

How to connect to two or more PGM10N/F(made by Yamatake Corporation)

+

–

+

–

+

–• • • •

RemarksNumber ofSSR Units

1

2

3


Parallel connection

Parallel connection(PGM10N only)

Chapter 5. DEVICE CONNECTIONS & CONFIGURATION

Number of Connected Units When connecting 15 or less units

Up to 15 DMC10s can be connected directly to a single host device (personalcomputer, programmable display device, PLC).

NoteThe following shows a guideline of the time required for communications:Communications time = (number of data items per unit) x 3.3ms + 27ms xnumber of connected unitsNote, however, that this value is a reference value that includes processing time onthe host (Windows98, Pentium III 800MHz) when a Yamatake host test program isused at a transmission speed of 19200bps.When 15 units of 4-channel model is multi-dropped under the above conditions,and also “PV of each device=4ch X 15 units (PV amount of 60 channels)” is readout,• Use of Yamatake CMC10L for RS-232C/RS-485 conversion • Communication command: RD03EA0004 (PV is read out for 4-channels on

each device)In this case, the communication completes in approx. 600ms.

5-1

CMC10LDMC10S/DMC10DMax. 15 units

• • • • •

This value may vary considerably according to the operation content of the hostdevice, content of communications with the DMC10, setup and commands used.The CMC10L is a converter for converting between RS-232C to RS-485communications.This converter is not required when the host device has a 3-lead RS-485communications port.

When connecting 16 or more units

CMC10B

CMC10B CMC10BMax. 15 units Max. 15 units Max. 15 units

RS-485 RS-485

CMC10L

DMC10SDMC10D

DMC10SDMC10D

DMC10SDMC10D

The communications converter CMC10B (sold separately) is needed to connect16 or more DMC10s.

NoteThe CMC10B allows up to 31 DMC10s to be connected to a host device.

Handling Precautions• The number of connected units refers to the number of units that can be

connected electrically. In this kind of connection, you must checkwhether or not the transmission speed is suited to the required level inthe application. Consult a Yamatake sales agent.

• Event output module DMC10E is not included in the number ofconnected units.

5-2

Setting the Device AddressThe device address must be set to the DMC10 in order to use the DMC10.

Set the device address as follows:

• When connecting 15 DMC10s directly to a single host device

Set the rotary switch for device address on the front panel to 1 to F, respectively,

and then turn the power ON again.

Handling PrecautionsThe same device address cannot be used. Use unique deviceaddresses.

• When connecting 15 DMC10s each to a host device via multiple CMC10Bs

(1) Set the rotary switch for device address on the CMC10B to a number within

the range 1 to 99.

(2) Set the rotary switch for device address on the front panel of the DMC10 to

a value within the range 1 to F.

CMC10L

CMC10B (Set a value 1 to 99.)

DMC10S/DMC10D(Set a value 1 to F.)

CMC10B (Set a value 1 to 99.)


CMC10B (Set a value 1 to 9


RS-485 RS-485


NoteThe CMC10B allows up to 31 DMC10s to be connected to a host device.

Handling Precautions• The CMC10B cannot be connected if MODBUS is used.• Be sure to set the device address of DMC10s connected to the same

CMC10B to unique values.• The same device address can be used when a DMC10 is connected

to different CMC10Bs.• For details on CMC10B settings, refer to the Communications

Controller CMC10B (CPL/CPL Converter) separate InstructionManual, Design Manual CP-SP-1064E.

5-3

Configuration When Combined with the CMC10

Connecting two CMC10sChange the setting of the communications disconnection switch on the base to the

right when two CMC10Bs are linked by the side connector. Slave

communications between CMC10s are independent of this setting.

Change setting of communications disconnection switch to right side.


(Example) In the following instrumentation configuration, the communications

disconnection switch on the base of only the CMC10Bs indicated in

the figure must be set to the right to isolate slave communications

with the CMC10B on the left side: This saves wiring to the power

supply.

CMC10L

CMC10BCMC10B

Position of CMC10BThe CMC10B can be positioned anywhere within a linked group.

CMC10B CMC10B

5-4

Layout of Event Output Module DMC10EOnly one event output module DMC10E can be used within a group linked by

connectors.

When the connection is made by wiring from the bases without using the side

connectors as shown below, each group is independent and a new event output

module can be used.

Position of event output module

DMC10E DMC10E DMC10E

DMC10E DMC10E

RS-485 communications RS-485 communications

Two or more units cannot be used in the same group.


The event output module DMC10E can be positioned anywhere within a linked

group.

DMC10E DMC10E

Chapter 6. SETUP & OPERATIONS

Overall Operation ProcedureThe following operation and preparations are required to use the DMC10:

6-1

Step1 Determine the values of the DMC10’s parameters for running from the user’s application.

Step2 Enter the setup parameters for running to the communications device.(computer, sequencer, PLC, etc.)

Step3 Write the setup parameters to the DMC10 from the communications device.(The DMC10 must be mounted on the panel and wired beforehand.)

Step4 Start running and tune the control constants.(This step is sometimes not required when self-tuning is used.)

NoteThe exclusive Smart Loader Package SLP-D10 is available for the DMC10.

This loader allows you to easily set up data before you start running the DMC10,

enter setup parameters for running, monitor operation while the DMC10 is

running and changing the settings.

When the exclusive Smart Loader Package is not used, the user must make the

program for the DMC10.

The Smart Loader Package drastically reduces the load in creating and debugging

programs, reduces trouble in setup and monitoring, and reduce the size of the

program on the host communications device.

Setup MethodThere are three ways of setting up the DMC10:

1. When the exclusive Smart Loader Package is used to set up the DMC10 or

monitor the DMC10 while it is running:

Proceed to “Chapter 7. LOADER.”

2. When a user program is used to set up the DMC10 or monitor the DMC10while it is running:

Proceed to “Chapter 10. COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS.”

3. When the exclusive Smart Loader Package is used to set the required setup

parameters before running the DMC10, and the user program is used to set

parameters such as SP (set point) or PV (process variable) that required

monitoring or changing while the DMC10 is running:

Read both “Chapter 7. LOADER” and “Chapter 10. COMMUNICATIONSFUNCTIONS.”

Chapter 7. LOADER7 - 1 Introduction

Loader FunctionsThe SLP-D10 has three functions:

• Setup function

• Monitor function

• Adjustment function

Setup functionThis function is for setting up parameters required for running the DMC10 on the

personal computer and writing (setting) them to the DMC10. Up to about 70 types

of parameters can be set.

Monitor functionAfter the setup parameters have been written to the DMC10, changes to and

tuning of control constants while the DMC10 is running, switching of modes

(RUN/READY, AUTO/MANUAL, etc.), run state and alarm occurrence can be

checked.

The run state can also be checked on the Trend screen, and sampled data can be

output in CSV format so that it can be handled in third-party spreadsheet software

such as Microsoft Excel.

Handling PrecautionsThe monitor target is limited to only one unit when the loader jack onthe front panel is used for performing monitoring.

Adjustment functionThis function is used when the user adjusting DMC10 input.

For details on the adjustment function, see “Chapter 12. ADJUSTMENT &ZENER BARRIER ADJUSTMENT.”

Handling PrecautionsWhen the adjustment function is used, adjustment value stored on theDMC10 so far are discarded. (When this function is used for the firsttime, the DMC10’s default adjustment values are discarded.) Paysufficient attention to this when using this function.

7-1

7-2

System Operating EnvironmentThe following system environment is required for using the SLP-D10:

Hardware

Reading/Saving

Hard disk

Communications

Special cable (provided)

DMC10

LDR

PWR

0

4

C

8

DMC10

ADR

CH3

21

22

23

24

25

CH1

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

21

22

23

24

25

CH4 CH2

SLP-D10

Chapter 7. LOADER

Handling Precautions• Before starting up SLP-D10, quit all other applications.

If you start up SLP-D10 while another application is running, SLP-D10may not function.Also, set the power save setting, infra-red communications and screensaver to OFF.

• Make sure that the [Decimal symbol] has been set to " . " for [ControlPanel]−[Regional Settings]−[Number]. If it has been set to othercharacter, the loader cannot correctly function.

Hardware configuration

NotePersonal computer used for confirmation of

operating environment.

Item

PersonalComputer

Application

PeripheralDevices

Target model

Memory

Operating system

USB port

Spreadsheet software

Web browser

Display

Hard disk drive

CD-ROM drive

Pointing device

Description

PC/AT compatible with a Pentium chip orhigher

32M byte or more

Windows98/Me/2000 Professional/XP Home edition/XP Professional

1 port or more

Excel, etc. (when using CSV files)

Internet Explorer, etc. (when using HTMLfiles)

Windows compatible display connectable toor built-into computer body

Hard disk with at least 40M byte of freespace

1 drive or more

Windows compatible mouse or equivalentdevice

Manufacturer Model No.Dell Optiplex Gxi5200Dell Optiplex GX5166Fujitsu FMV-5166T3

7 - 2 Installing, Starting up and Quitting the Software Package

InstallationThis section describes how to install the SLP-D10 on a personal computer.

Handling PrecautionsIf you start up the Installer while another application is running, the Installermay malfunction.Remove other resident applications from their directories before starting upthe Installer.The SLP-D10 sometimes cannot be started up depending on thecombination of other applications and drivers.For details on Windows and personal computer settings, refer to the User’sManuals provided with Windows and the personal computer.

Installing SLP-D10(1) Put the CD in the CD-ROM drive of your personal computer.

>> The installation program starts automatically and the following screen

appears:

(2) Only when the SLP-D10 of old version has been installed, click [OK] to delete

the old SLP-D10.

7-3

Chapter 7. LOADER

The following screen appears:

(3) Click [Next>].

7-4

NoteTo change the installation destination directory, click [Browse...].

(4) Click [Next>].The following screen appears.

Chapter 7. LOADER

(5) Click [Next>].

NoteTo change the group, enter the new group name.

7-5

Chapter 7. LOADER

(6) Click [Next>].

(7) Click [Finish].When installation ends normally, the following screen appears:

7-6

Device Driver Installation for USB Loader CableA device driver must be installed before using the USB loader cable.

Follow the procedure below to install the device driver.

Installing the device driver

Handling Precautions• Be sure to follow the procedure below when installing the device driver.

The USB cable may not be recognized if the procedure is not followed. Ifthe cable is not recognized, uninstall the driver and then install it again.

• Administrator privileges on the computer are required for driverinstallation. Installation should be done by the administrator or by a userwho belongs to the administrator group.The USB loader cable is supported on Windows 98/Me/2000/XP (32 bittype). It is not supported on 64-bit Windows XP, or on Windows 95,Windows NT, MS-DOS or PC-DOS.

• If there are multiple USB ports, connect the USB loader cable to thesame port every time. If it is connected to a different port, there is achance that driver installation may be required again.

1. Put the SLP CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the personal computer.When the installation program starts, cancel it.

2. Insert the USB loader cable into the USB port.>>When Windows recognizes the USB cable, the notification shown below

appears on the task tray and the driver installation wizard appears.

3. Install the device driver.(1) Usually, when Windows recognizes the USB loader cable, the window shown

below appears. (In some cases, depending on the Windows environment, it

may not appear.) Select [No, not this time] and click [Next >].

Chapter 7. LOADER

7-7

(2) For the retrieval location of the device driver to be installed, select [Install from

a list or specific location (Advanced)] and click [Next >].

>>Retrieval of the device driver starts.

>>When the device driver is found, the following window appears:

(3) Click [Continue Anyway].>>Installation of device driver starts.

Chapter 7. LOADER

7-8

>>When the device driver installation is complete, the following window

appears:

(4) Click [Finish].>>When the installation is complete, the notification shown below appears on

the task tray, and Windows now correctly recognizes the USB loader cable.

(5) Get the number of the Yamatake USB Loader Comm. port from [Ports (COM& LPT)]. [Ports (COM & LPT)] may be found by navigating to [ControlPanel] → [System] → [Hardware] → [Device Manager] (for Windows

XP/2000), or [Control Panel] → [System] → [Device Manager] (for

Windows 98/Me).

(6) Start the Smart Loader Program, select [Menu] → [Option(E)], and set to the

communications port number obtained in the previous step. Then press the

[OK] to complete the configuration.

Chapter 7. LOADER

7-9

NoteIf the CD-ROM for the SLP is not available for the retrieval of the device driver to

be installed in step (2) above, select [Install from a list or specific location(Advanced)] and click [Next >].

Then, click [Browse] to specify the folder in which SLP is installed, and click

[Next >]. Standard folder locations are:

• For SLP-C35J50, normally [C:\Program Files\slp\SLPC35].• For SLP-C35PRO, normally [C:\Program Files\slp\SLPC35PRO].• For SLP-D10, normally [C:\Program Files\slp\SLPD10].

Proceed with steps (3) to (6).

Uninstalling the device driver

Handling Precautions• Removing the driver requires restarting the computer. Close other

applications first, and then uninstall the driver.• To uninstall the driver, administrator rights are required on the computer.

Uninstalling should be done by the administrator or by a user whobelongs to the administrator group.

1. Execute the driver removal program.(1) Start the removal program, DrvRemover_Ycslip.exe, by double-clicking the

icon on the CD-ROM. If the SLP CD-ROM is not available, there is also

a copy of DrvRemover_Ycslip.exe in the folder in which SLP is installed:

• Normally [C:\Program Files\slp\SLPD10].>>A confirmation dialog box for the driver removal appears.

(2) Click [OK].

>>The following window appears:

(3) To complete the removal of the driver, the computer must be restarted.

Click [Yes] to restart the computer.

Chapter 7. LOADER

7-10

Starting Up SLP-D10(1) Click [Start] at the bottom of the screen, and click the [SLP-D10 (DMC10)]

under [Programs]-[SLP].The SLP-D10 is started up, and the menu window is displayed.

NoteFor details on the operating system and the mouse you are using, refer to theUser’s Manual provided with Windows.

Quitting SLP-D10(1) Click [close] at the top right of the screen.

The operation is the same by selecting the [Menu]-[Quit] command.

(2) Click [OK].

Quit dialog box

Chapter 7. LOADER

7 - 3 Setup Function

Outline of Setup FunctionThe setup function allows you to set the various parameters (about 10 to 70

constants required for operation) and write these parameters to the DMC10 so that

it functions according to your particular control requirements. When the DMC10is used for the first time, it will not function as required unless it is set up by using

this setup function.

Parameters such as SP (set point) and control constants (PID values) that are

changed relatively frequently while the DMC10 is running can also be set from

the monitor function screen.

By the setup function, parameters that hardly need changing later once they are set

are saved to file in list format before the DMC10 is run, and the saved file is

called up and written to the DMC10 in a single operation.

Screen Explanations

Menu screen

7-11

Chapter 7. LOADER

Menu

Menu

Help

Icon Sub Menu

Setup

Monitor

Adjust

Option (E)

Quit

Version (A)

Description

Displays the Setup window.

Displays the Monitor/Trendwindow.

Displays the Adjustmentwindow.

Changes the environmentsetup.

Quits the application.

Displays the versioninformation.

Shortcut Keys

Ctrl+S

Ctrl+M

Ctrl+J

Ctrl+E

Ctrl+Q

Ctrl+A

7-12

Setup screen

Menu bar

Button bar

Selection window

Message window

Parameter display area

Chapter 7. LOADER

* Data of the row at the current cursor position is copied and pasted one row at a time.

Menu

File

Edit

Communica-tion

Setup

User Level

Option

Icon Sub Menu

New

Open

Save

Save As

CSV Out (X)

HTML Out (H)

Quit

Data Check

Bit Edit

Copy

Paste

Read(DMC10→SLP)

Write(SLP→DMC10)

Standard(A)

Option(B)

Basic(L1)

Standard(L2)

High function(L3)

Type Setting

Environment Setting

Special function (U)

Zener barrier adjust (Z)

Automatic motor adjust-ment (M)

Description

Creates new data.

Opens existing data.

Saves the active data.

Saves the active data with a new name.

Saves the active data in CSV format.

Saves the active data in HTML format.

Quits the application.

Checks all setting values.

Inputs to bit lists.

Stores the copy source.*

Pastes the stored copy data.*

Reads the device data.

Writes the data to the device.

Changes the type setting.

Changes the environment setup.

Shortcut Keys

Ctrl+N

Ctrl+O

Ctrl+S

Ctrl+A

Ctrl+X

Ctrl+H

Ctrl+Q

Ctrl+D

Ctrl+B

Ctrl+C

Ctrl+V

Ctrl+R

Ctrl+W

Ctrl+T

Ctrl+E

7-13

Operation Procedure

Off-line tasks“Off-line tasks” are tasks performed without connecting cables to the DMC10.

The following tasks are performed:

Step 1: Setting up the loader type

Step 2: Initialization (clearing previous setting values)

Step 3: Setting up the environment

Step 4: Setting special functions

Step 5: Setting up DMC10 parameters

Step 6: Saving setup data

Step 7: Downloading the setup

Handling PrecautionsOperations in steps 1 to 6 are required before the setup parametersare entered on the DMC10. Be sure to perform these steps. Otherwise,the DMC10 may be set up incorrectly. For example, the required setupitems may not be displayed or unrequired items may be displayed.

Step 1 (setting up the loader type)Set up the SLP-D10’s type to match the DMC-10’s model number.

(1) Click .

The operation is the same by selecting the [Option]-[Type Setting] command

or the [Ctrl] + [T] keys.

The Type Setting dialog box is displayed.

Chapter 7. LOADER

(2) Set the functions, number of control loops, wiring method, control output and

additional functions.

(3) Select from the selection items for each setting item.

(4) Click [OK].

NoteThe type setting can also be set by uploading the data from the DMC10 to beused. This prevents downloading wrong parameter data by setting an incorrectmodel number.

Handling Precautions• “Type” set here is the setting for internal use on the SLP-D10. The

model number of the DMC10 will not change even if the type ischanged on the SLP-D10.

• If you select [4ch] when designating the [Loop], “Connect” is forciblyfixed to “Connector” and “add” to “None”.

• For an explanation of each of the specifications, see the ModelSelection Guide.

Step 2 (initialization)(1) Click [New].

The operation is the same by selecting the [File]-[New] command or the

[Ctrl] + [N] keys.

The New dialog box appears.

Chapter 7. LOADER

(2) Click [OK].A new file opens.

Step 3 (setting up the environment)Set the communications port and font on the personal computer.

(1) Click .

The operation is the same by selecting the [Option]-[Environment Setting]command or the [Ctrl] + [E] keys.

The Environment Setting dialog

box appears.

(2) Set the communications port. Select the port from the selection items.

(3) Set the font size. Select the front size from the selection items.

(4) Click [OK].

Handling Precautions• Normally, use “COM1”.

Even if another communications port can be selected, it sometimescannot be used depending on its shape.

• Normally, use “Use Loader Cable.”

7-14

Step 4 (setting special functions)Set this item to use special functions. To display the setting items relating to thespecial functions, click the check box in front of the function name to be used.[Multi-SP set] Set this item when using multiple SP sets. The DMC10 holds

up to 16 SP values.[Event output special operation]

Set this item to use event output assignments. See page 8-3.[External switch input special operation]

Set this item to use external switch assignments. See page 8-4.[Heat/cool control] DMC10D only Use heat/cool control. See page 9-2.[Remote SP input] DMC10D only User remote SP input. See page 9-2.[MV branch output] DMC10D only Use MV branch output.[Position proportional control type]

DMC10D only Use position proportional control type.[Energy saving] DMC10D only Use energy saving function.

Step 5 (Setting up DMC10 parameters)Move the cursor to the target channel of each setup item, and perform thefollowing operations:• When the setting is a numerical value:

Enter the numerical value, and press the Return key.• When a setting is selected by a number:

To display the list of settings, click the setting display on theparameter display area. Select and click the desired item nameto end the setting.

Set each of the parameters required for running the DMC10. The following twotypes of parameters are set:• Basic functions: Basic functions for device operation such as control and

communications functions• Option functions: Functions relating to option specification such as event

output, external switch input, and current transformer input

Handling Precautions• In addition to the above functions, the DMC10 has several other

functions called “special functions.” These functions are settinggroups or setting items within basic functions or option functions.For details on the functions, see “Chapter 8. SETUP PARAMETERS(Common to DMC10S and DMC10D)” and “Chapter 9. SETUPPARAMETERS (DMC10D).”

• “– – – –” is displayed within the cell for parameters whose setting isnot required or is prohibited by other setting items. These parameterscannot be set. In this case, re-check the type setting or other relatedsettings.

• Items on the horizontal axis are channel numbers when basicfunctions are being set up, and are event output numbers or externalswitch input numbers when option functions are being set up.

• About connection to the personal computerNormally, the special cable is used for connecting the personalcomputer to the DMC10. However, the CMC10B/L is used to enablethe connection to the DMC10 when the communications setup is tobe changed by the [Option]-[Environment Setting]-[CommunicationSetup] command. Before the CMC10B/L is connected, thecommunications setup of the loader must be matched to that of theDMC10. The communications setup cannot be changed when thespecial cable is used.

Chapter 7. LOADER

7-15

7-16

Step 6 (saving setup data)When you have finished making the settings, save the setup.

Saving setups in advance and using saved setups greatly reduces the time and load

when setting up the loader. The following items are saved:

• Type

• Use/non-use of special functions

• Setup parameters

(1) Click [Save As].Select the [File] command.

The operation is the same by selecting the [Ctrl] + [A] keys.

The Save As dialog box appears.

Chapter 7. LOADER

(2) Enter the file name, and click [Save].

Step 7 (downloading the setup)Write the set parameters or parameters called up from a saved file to the DMC10.

(1) Use the special loader cable to connect the personal computer to the DMC10body to write the setup parameters to.

(2) Turn the DMC10 ON.

(3) Click .

The operation is the same by selecting [Write(SLP→DMC10)] command in

the pull-down menu.

The message “Writing is going to be executed.” is displayed.

(4) Click [OK].This starts writing of the setup parameters.

During writing, the message “Please wait.” is displayed. When writing

ends, the message “Normal end” is displayed.

Handling PrecautionsIf writing fails, the message “Communications error has occurred.” isdisplayed.If writing is not possible, refer to “Chapter 13. TROUBLESHOOTING.”

7 - 4 Monitor Function

OutlineThe Smart Loader Package SLP-D10 exclusively for the DMC10 is used formonitoring DMC10 operation.To enter the monitor screens, click [Monitor] in the menu screen.The Smart Loader Package has the following two monitor screens:

Numeric Monitor screen:This screen is for performing operations such aschanging setups or switching modes.• Numeric display of the various running parameters

(parameters can be changed)• Lamp indication of the various running modes

(lamp indications can be operated)• Alarm display (representative and detailed)

Trend Monitor screen: This screen is for monitoring the running state of theDMC10 in the form of a trend graph.• Screen display of trends for max. of eight data items• Export of sampled data as CSV file• Trend screen dumps• Data type: PV, SP, MV, user-defined

data (all analog data that canbe communicated)

• Sampling cycle: Variable within the range 1 to3600s

• Max. sampling count:7200 (fixed regardless ofnumber of data items tosample)

NoteA “CSV file” is the data format that can be handled in third-party spreadsheetsoftware such as Microsoft Excel. In this format, sampled trend data can beinterpreted in spreadsheet software.

These screens can be used to perform the following operations:• Monitoring of the running state and changing of parameters in the Numeric

Monitor screen• Switching of the run mode in the Numeric Monitor screen• Tuning of control constants in the Numeric Monitor screen• Monitoring of trends and sampling of data while the DMC10 is running• Monitoring of alarm states in the Numeric Monitor screen

Handling Precautions• About connection to the personal computer

The loader must be connected to the DMC10 by the loader cable whenthe Smart Loader Package SLP-D10 is used to set up the DMC10 ormonitor its running.To access other DMC10s, the loader cable must be swapped.

• The Trend screen must be set up to start the trend monitor. Be sure toset up the Trend screen before starting monitoring.

• The sampling cycle sometimes shifts due to fluctuations in thecommunications cycle. To perform measurement at exact times, use thespecial recorder or data logger.

7-17

Chapter 7. LOADER

7-18

Screen Explanations

Numeric Monitor screen

Chapter 7. LOADER

Trend Monitor screen

Menu

File

NumericMonitor (M)

TrendMonitor (T)

Window (W)

Option (O)

Icon Sub Menu

New

Quit

Numeric MonitorStart/Stop (M)

Trend MonitorStart/Stop (T)

CSV Out (X)

Clipboard GraphOut (C)

Numeric Monitor(M)

Numeric GroupMonitor (G)

Trend Monitor (T)

Setup

Alarm (A)

Command Line (C)

Description

Initializes the monitor/trend setup.

Quits the Monitor window.

Starts/stops the monitor.

Starts/stops trend sampling.

Outputs the trend data in CSVformat.

Outputs an image of the graph to theClipboard.

Displays individual numeric monitors.

Displays numeric group monitors.

Displays trend monitors.

Displays the Setup window.

Displays the Alarm Details window.

Displays the Command Line window.

Shortcut Keys

Ctrl+N

Ctrl+Q

Ctrl+M

Ctrl+T

Ctrl+X

Ctrl+C

7-19

How to Operate the Numeric Monitor Screen

Start of monitoring (start of communications)The following operation is required to start monitoring. Otherwise, monitoring and

rewriting of data cannot be performed:

• Click .

The operation is the same by selecting [Numeric Monitor]-[Numeric Monitor Start].During normal operation: The data on the DMC10 is displayed.

During an error: The message “Check the device to which the loaderis connected.” is displayed. Remedy according to

“Chapter 13. TROUBLESHOOTING.”

The following operations are possible when the device and the loader are correctly

connected:

Monitoring of run state and changing of parameters

Chapter 7. LOADER

* The ON/OFF state of monitor event bus outputs for event bus output ON/OFFstates are reflected only on devices where ON (or OFF) operation has beenperformed on the event bus output. On other devices, the ON/OFF state isindicated on screen as “OFF”.

NoteChannels can be appended a label name for on-screen use only. This name isfor screen use only, and is not downloaded to the DMC10.

Numeric monitor (displayedin table format)Numeric group monitor

State monitor (displayed inlamp lighting format)

Operation (Operationspossible in numericchanges are limited asfollows.)

Lamps (Lamps operable byclicking are limited asfollows.)About the operation mode

LabelPVSP valueSP setManipulated variable (MV)PID valueHeater current valueRUN/READY modeAUTO/MANUAL modeAuto-tuning start/stop stateRUN/READY modeAUTO/MANUAL modeAuto-tuning start/stop stateSelf-tuning start/stop stateControl output ON/OFF stateEvent output ON/OFF stateEvent bus output ON/OFF state*External switch input ON/OFF statePV alarm occurrence conditionAlarm occurrence conditionSP value changeSP set changeManipulated variable (MV) change in MANUAL modePID value changeRUN↔READY switchingAUTO↔MANUAL switchingAuto-tuning start↔stop switchingEntry of channel tag nameRUN↔READY switchingAUTO↔MANUAL switchingAuto-tuning start↔stop switchingRUN/READY mode 0: RUN 1: READYAUTO/MANUAL mode 0: AUTO 1: MANUAL

7-20

Changing of data, switching of modes• Operation by entry of numerical values → Enter the numerical value, and press

the Return key.

• Operation by clicking a lamp → Click the target lamp indication.

Setting of user-defined addressOptional data not in the table can be registered to user configuration address UF 1

to 4 in the table. Data can be read or written according to the data type.

How to set user-defined address:

(1) Select the [Set monitor] tag under [Option (O)]-[Setup] in the pull-down

menu.

(2) Enter the address of the data to display according to “10-8 List of AllCommunications Parameters” (page 10-16).

Handling PrecautionsUp to four user configuration data items can be set. This data,however, is common to all channels.

Use of the command lineData can be read or written or the mode switched by directly entering

communications commands on the command line.

Handling Precautions• Transmission of the wrong command may result in trouble on the

DMC10. For this reason, take sufficient care when describingcommand types, addresses, data and other information.

• For details on communications commands and data addresses, see“Chapter 10. COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS.”

• Memory protection is enabled.

Checking details of alarmsYou can check the details of alarms in the Alarm window when an alarm occurs.

• Click .

The operation is the same by selecting the [Option (O)]-[Alarm (A)].• The details of the alarm that is occurring are displayed.

Handling PrecautionsThis window displays the details of currently occurring alarms, anddoes not have a function for restoring the DMC10. To restore theDMC10, you must perform the appropriate remedy described in“Chapter 13. TROUBLESHOOTING.”

About the numeric group monitorThe numeric group monitor can be used when [Connect via CMC10] is set by the

[Environment Setting]-[Communication Setup] command. Connect the loader

cable to CMC10B. Up to eight groups can be monitored.

Chapter 7. LOADER

7-21

How to Operate the Trend Monitor

SetupSelect [Trend Setup] at [Option (O)]-[Setup], and make the following settings

for each sampled data (1 to 8).

As the cycle and display upper/lower limits are common to all channels, these

items can be set for sampled data 1 and not for sampled data 2 to 8.

Chapter 7. LOADER

Handling PrecautionsWhen a user-defined address has been specified, numerical values aredisplayed without a decimal point. Manually set the decimal pointposition in the Numeric Monitor Setup screen.

Starting samplingWhen you have finished making the settings, monitoring of trends can be started.

Click .

The operation is the same by selecting the [Trend Monitor]-[Trend Monitor Start].This starts trend sampling, and the trend of the specified parameter is displayed on

screen.

• When trend monitoring is started, operation is continued until either operation is

stopped or until data has been sampled for 7200 times.

• Trend monitoring automatically stops when data has been sampled for 7200

times even if operation is not stopped.

• During trend monitoring, the Numeric Monitor screen can be entered, but the

loader cannot be quit nor the Setup screen entered. To quit the loader or enter

the Setup screen, quit trend monitoring.

Setting ItemCycleDisplay lowerlimitDisplay upperlimitDisplay

Data type

User-definedaddressCommunicationsaddressCommunicationssub-address

DescriptionSetting of sampling cycleLower value of vertical axis of screen display

Upper value of vertical axis of screen display

Designation of display/non-display onscreenType of sampled data

Address of relevant parameter when thedata type is set as “user type”Set the communications address when aCMC10B, for example, is used.Set the communications sub-address whena CMC10B, for example, is used.

Setting Range1 to 3600s–2000 to display upperlimitDisplay lower limit to100000: Display OFF1: Display ON0: Not used1: PV of channel 12: PV of channel 23: PV of channel 34: PV of channel 45: MV of channel 16: MV of channel 27: MV of channel 38: MV of channel 49: SP of channel 110: SP of channel 211: SP of channel 312: SP of channel 413: User-defined dataAddress of communicableparameter0 to 127

0 to 127

Factory Setting10

0

1

7-22

Stopping samplingSelect [Trend Monitor]-[Trend Monitor Stop].This stops monitoring of the trend.

Saving sampled dataData sampled by trend monitoring can be saved to file in CSV format. Data

sampled in this format can be handled in third-party spreadsheet software such as

Microsoft Excel.

Handling Precautions• Data can also be saved to file while trend monitoring is in operation.• Data saved to file remains on screen or on the personal computer as

long as the loader is not initialized. The data, however, cannot be re-displayed on screen.

Clipboard graph outputThe display details on the Trend Monitor screen can be saved to Clipboard as a

screen dump.

Chapter 7. LOADER

Chapter 8. SETUP PARAMETERS (Common to DMC10S and DMC10D)

8 - 1 List of Setup Parameters

Basic FunctionsFor details, see “8-2 Explanation of Basic Functions” (page 8-5).

E: Easy S: Standard M: Multi-function

8-1

Category

PV input

Controloutput

Item Name

Input type

Temperature unit

Decimal point position

PV range lower limit

PV range upper limit

PV bias

PV filter

Cold junctioncompensation action

Lower SP limit

Upper SP limit

SP down gradient

SP up gradient

SP up gradient timeunit

Control method

Control action

Time proportional cycle

Time proportionaloperating mode

PID initial MV

AUTO/MANUALswitching action

Preset manual value

MV in READY mode

MV at PV alarmoccurrence

MV rate-of-change limit

Self-tuning up/downstartup condition

Self-tuning correctionwidth

Setting Range

According to PV input type range table

0: °C1: Special unit

0: With no decimal point1: 1 decimal digit is indicated2: 2 decimal digits are indicated3: 3 decimal digits are indicated

–2000 to +10000

–2000 to +10000

–2000 to +10000

0.0 to 120.0s

0: Internal1: External

PV range lower value to upper SPlimit value

Upper SP limit value to PV rangeupper value

0 to 10000

0 to 10000

0: unit/min1: unit/h

0: ON/OFF control1: Control by self-tuning2: Control by PID fixed values

0: Heat control (reverse action)1: Cooling control (direct action)

5 to 120s (relay output)1 to 120s (voltage output)

0: Priority on controllability1: Priority on control device life*

–10.0 to +110.0%

0: Bumpless1: Preset

–10.0 to +110.0%

–10.0 to +110.0%

–10.0 to +110.0%

0.1 to 100.0%

0: Start at both rise and fall of PVvalue

1: Start at rise of PV value

0.0 to 5.0°C (at temperaturesensor input)

0.0 to 3.0%FS (at linear input)

Factory Setting

43: 0 to 5V

0: °C

0: With nodecimal point

0

1000

0

0.0s

0: Internal

PV range lowerlimit

PV range upperlimit

0

0

0

0: ON/OFF control

0: Heat control

10s

0: Priority oncontrollability

0.0%

0: Bumpless

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

100.0%

0: Start at bothrise and fall ofPV value

2.0°C

0.5%FS

UserLevel

E/S/M

M

S/M

E/S/M

E/S/M

S/M

M

M

S/M

S/M

M

M

M

E/S/M

E/S/M

E/S/M

M

M

S/M

S/M

M

M

M

M

M

Remarks

See page 14-3.

At thermocouple or RTD input

Settable at DC voltage or DCcurrent input. Or, somethermocouple or RTD rangessettable

Settable at DC voltage or DCcurrent input

Settable at DC voltage or DCcurrent input

-

-

At thermocouple input only

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Not settable at ON/OFF control

* ON/OFF action once withintime proportional cycle. Notsettable at ON/OFF control


MANUAL mode cannot beswitched to at ON/OFF control.


-

-


Only at control by self-tuning

Only at control by self-tuning

Category

SP, controlparameters

Communi-cations

Others

8-2


Item Name

SP value

Proportional band (P)

Reset time (I)

Rate time (D)

MV lower value (OL)

MV upper value (OH)

Manual reset value (rE)

Differential

Disturbance responsecoefficient (Quick-FiTTER)Transmission speed

Data format

Min. communicationsresponse time

Addition to the min. communi-cations response timeCPL/MODBUSswitching

Memory protection

LED operation type

Channel targeted for LED operation

Setting Range

Lower SP limit value to upper SPlimit value

0.1 to 999.9%

0 to 3600s

0 to 1200s

–10% to MV upper value

MV lower value to 110%

–10 to +110%

1 to 9999unit

0 to 30

0: 2400bps1: 4800bps2: 9600bps3: 19200bps0: 8bits, even parity, 1 stop bit1: 8bits, no parity, 2 stop bits0: 1ms1: 10ms2: 100ms3: 200ms0 to 100ms

0: CPL1: MODBUS (ASCII format)2: MODBUS (RTU format)0: All writable1: Only SP, EV, MODE and

communications DI writable2: Only SP, MODE and

communications DI writable3: Not writable except memory

protection0: Lit at all times1: Blinking in READY mode2: Blinking in MANUAL mode3: Blinking in RSP mode4: Blinking at self-tuning

correction standby 5: Blinking at execution of auto-

tuning6: Blinking at PV alarm

occurrence7: Blinking at memory alarm

occurrence8: SP set selection number

blinking9: Blinking during master

communications10:Blinking during master/loader

communications11:Control output mode (lit when ON)12:Event output mode (lit when ON)13:Event bus output switch mode

(lit when ON)14:External switch input mode

(lit when ON)15:External bus mode (lit when ON)16:Communications DI input mode

(lit when ON)17:Blinking during inter-channel

deviation control18:Blinking during SP gradient

time19:Blinking during inference of

motor control position0: OR operation on all channels1: channel 12: channel 23: channel 34: channel 4

Factory Setting

0

5.0%

120s

30s

0%

100%

50%

5unit

0

3: 19200bps

0: 8bits, evenparity, 1 stop bit

1: 10ms

0

0

0: All writable

0: Lit at all times

0: OR operationon all channels

UserLevelE/S/M

E/S/M

E/S/M

E/S/M

M

M

S/M

S/M

M

E/S/M

E/S/M

M

M

M

E/S/M

M

M

Remarks

-

Settable during control by PIDfixed valuesSettable during control by PIDfixed valuesSettable during control by PIDfixed valuesNot settable during ON/OFFcontrolNot settable during ON/OFFcontrolSettable during control by PIDfixed values and when resettime = 0sSettable during ON/OFFcontrolNot settable during ON/OFFcontrol

-

-

Min. time from end ofcommand reception up to startof return of response

Added to the min. communica-tions response time.

-

Can be changed on loader.

-

LED action type settings: Notsettable in the case of 7, 9 and10

8-3

Option FunctionsThe following option functions are available:

For details, refer to “8-3 Detailed Explanation of Option Functions” (page

8-16) onwards. Items that are displayed vary according to model number of the

DMC10 and the use setting of special functions.

• Event output

• Current transformer input

• External switch input


Category

Eventoutput(wheneventoutputspecialaction isnot used)

Item Name

Type of action

Target channel

Alarm OR action

Event setting value(main)Event setting value(sub)Hysteresis

Direct/reverse action

Standby

Latch

Action in READY mode

Setting Range

0: No event1: PV upper limit2: PV lower limit3: PV upper/lower limit4: Deviation upper limit

(current reference SP)5: Deviation lower limit

(current reference SP)6: Deviation upper/lower limit

(current reference SP)7: Inter-channel deviation upper

limit8: Inter-channel deviation lower

limit9: Inter-channel deviation

upper/lower limit10:READY mode11:MANUAL mode12:Control action (direct)13:Auto-tuning startup mode14:Self-tuning correction standby

mode15:Loop diagnosis16:Timer17:Heater line break/overcurrent18:Heater short-circuit19: Individual channel, PV, alarm20:Memory alarm21:LOCAL22:SP upper limit23:SP lower limit24:SP upper/lower limit25:Deviation upper limit

(final reference SP)26:Deviation lower limit

(final reference SP)27:Deviation upper/lower limit

(final reference SP)28:SP gradient in progress29: Inference of motor control

position in progress30:Loop diagnosis 21 or 2 (in case of 2-channelmodels)1 to 4 (in case of 4-channelmodels)0: None1: OR action used

According to action type



0: Direct action1: Reverse action0: None1: Standby2: Standby + standby at SP change0: None1: Latch operation0: Action continued in READY mode1: Action forcibly turned OFF in

READY mode

Factory Setting

0: No event

EV/BUS 1→1EV/BUS 2→2EV/BUS 3→3EV/BUS 4→40: None

0

1000

5

0: Direct

0: None

0: None

0: Actioncontinued inREADY mode

UserLevelE/S/M

E/S/M

M

E/S/M

E/S/M

S/M

E/S/M

S/M

M

M

Remarks

-

Not settable when action typeis set to 0

-

See “Appendix, Advice onEvents.”See “Appendix, Advice onEvents.”See “Appendix, Advice onEvents.”

-

Standby action restarted at SPchange

-

-

8-4


Category

Event output(when eventoutput specialaction is notused)

Currenttransformerinput

Externalswitchinput

Auxiliaryinput

Item Name

ON delay time (h)ON delay time (min)ON delay time (s)OFF delay time (h)OFF delay time (min)OFF delay time (s)Designated channel forcurrent transformerinput

Measurement standbytimeType of action

Target channel


Type of action

Target channel

Output type

0% setting100% setting

Setting Range

0 to 99h0 to 59min0 to 59s0 to 99h

0 to 59min0 to 59s

0: OUT11: OUT23: EV14: EV25: EV36: EV4

3 to 30 (x 10ms)

0: No function1: “1” added to SP set number2: “2” added to SP set number3: “4” added to SP set number4: RUN/READY5: AUTO/MANUAL6: LOCAL/REMOTE7: Auto-tuning stop/start8: Self-tuning stop/execution9: Timer stop/start10:Latch state release11: Inter-channel deviation control

switching12: Inter-channel deviation control

type13:External switch input state14:SP lamp stop0: All channels1: Channel 12: Channel 23: Channel 34: Channel 40: Direct1: Reverse0: PV/RSP value1: PV1-PV2 value2: SP value3: Manipulated variable4: Heat side manipulated variable5: Cooling side manipulated

variable6: Manipulated variable (PID

calculation results before ratiooperation)

7: Feedback value1: Channel 12: Channel 20: 4 to 20mA1: 1 to 20mA

–2000 to +10000–2000 to +10000

Factory Setting

000000

CT1→1CT2→2

3

0: No function

0: Direct

0

AUX→1AUX→2

0

01000

UserLevel

MMMMMMM

E/S/M

E/S/M

E/S/M

S/M

E/S/M

S/M

M

E/S/ME/S/M

Remarks

-------

Standby time = setting value x10msEven on models w/out theexternal switch input option,use with internal bus ispossible.

Action types: 1 to 5, 7, 8Channels 3 and 4 are possibleon 4-channel models.

-

-

-

-

--

8 - 2 Explanation of Basic Functions

8-5


PV Input Input type

This item is for setting the type of PV input. In the case of a temperature sensor,set the sensor type and temperature range, and in the case of DC voltage/DCcurrent input, set the type of signal. The DC voltage/DC current range and decimalpoint position are set in the PV range lower value and PV range upper value items.

Note• On the DMC10, temperature sensor and DC current/voltage signals can be

used as PV input. Also, different input types can be assigned to eachchannel.

• When there is an unused channel, control output and PV alarm are OFF bysetting range number “0”. For this reason, wiring to PV input on unusedchannels is not required.

Temperature unitThis item is for setting the temperature unit when a temperature sensor is used forthe PV input.The temperature unit can be set for thermocouple unit or RTD unit.

Decimal point position (when some input types are DC voltage, DC current or RTD, andwhen some input types are thermocouple on advanced function models)

Set the decimal point position of the range when some input types are DC voltage,DC current or RTD, and when some input types are thermocouple. This settingchanges the decimal point position of all related parameters to the setting madehere. (Related parameters are: PV, SP, PV-related event setting values, PV bias,SP upper limit, SP lower limit, inter-channel deviation control value, auxiliaryoutput 0%, 100% setting, SP up gradient, and SP down gradient.)

Handling Precautions• When the decimal point has been changed, each of the already set

parameter values must be set again.Example: SP is 40.0 when the decimal point position is changed to the

No.1 position after SP is set to 400.• When a range whose decimal point cannot be changed has been set,

this decimal point position cannot be written by communications.Example: In the case of range No.1, the decimal point position is fixed to

“0”. However, “0” cannot be written.

Item

Input type

Description

See Range Code Table(page 13-3).

Factory Setting

43: 0 to 5V

User Level

E/S/M

Item

Temperatureunit

Description

0: °C1: Special unit

Factory Setting

0: °C

User Level

M

Related setting item: Input type

Item

Decimal pointposition

Description0: With no decimal point1: 1 decimal digit is indicated2: 2 decimal digits are indicated3: 3 decimal digits are indicated

Factory Setting

0: With no decimalpoint

User Level

S/M

Related setting item: Input type • PV range lower limit • PV range upper limit • PV-related eventsetting values, inter-channel deviation control deviation value, auxiliaryoutput 0%, 100% setting, SP up gradient, SP down gradient

8-6

PV range upper/lower value (only when input type is DC voltage or DC current)This item is for setting the PV range upper/lower values when the input type is DC

voltage or DC current.

Set the indication value when the input signal is the minimum value or maximum

value. (In the case of DC 4 to 20mA input, set the minimum value when 4mA is

input, and the maximum value when 20mA is input.)

PV filter0.0 to 120.0s (0.0 indicates that filter is OFF.)A primary delay digital filter can be applied to PV.

PV filterIN OUT


PV biasThis item is used when performing PV value offset.

Offset is used when the sensor has deteriorated.

PV filterThis item is used when the PV value suddenly fluctuates repeatedly and control is

not possible, or when the PV value fluctuates minutely due to the influence of

noise. In almost all cases, this item can be used at its default, and so it need not be

set.

NoteMinute fluctuation of the PV value leads to sudden fluctuation of the manipulated

variable. When the control device is frequently switched ON and OFF, or when

the heater current value, for example, that is currently being controlled repeatedly

fluctuates suddenly, the PV filter can also be used to stabilize the PV value.

Note, however, that when the PV filter is used, the actual PV value may differ

from the apparent PV value due to a delay.

This relationship is shown by the following formula:

OUT = OUT–1 + (IN – OUT–1)/(T/TS+1)

IN: Input to PV filter

OUT: Current filter calculation output

OUT–1: Previous filter calculation output

T: Filter setting value (s)

Ts: Sampling cycle (500ms)

Item

PV range lowerlimitPV range upperlimit

Description

–2000 to +10000

2000 to 10000

Factory Setting

0

1000

User Level

E/S/M

Related setting item: Input type • Decimal point position

Item

PV bias

Description

–2000 to +10000

Factory Setting

0

User Level

S/M

Item

PV filter

Description

0.0 to 120.0s

Factory Setting

0.0s

User Level

M

8-7

Cold junction compensation operation (at thermocouple input only)This item is used when a cold junction compensator such as an ice box is used to

perform control more accurately instead of the DMC10’s internal cold junction

compensation function on a thermocouple.


Upper SP limit/lower SP limitThese items are for setting the upper and lower limits of the SP value setting

range. SP values outside of the range set here cannot be written.

SP down gradient, SP up gradient, SP down gradient time unitThese items are for setting the SP up gradient, down gradient and gradient time

unit.

In the instances described below, the current PV value is taken to be the start SP

value, and the SP value gradually rises (or falls) in the form of a gradient towards

the final SP value. These items are used, for example, to make the PV value rise

(or fall) gradually.

• When the power is turned ON

• When the MANUAL mode is switched to the AUTO mode

• When the READY mode is switched to the RUN mode

• When auto-tuning ends

In the instance described below, the last SP value in the REMOTE mode is taken

to be the start SP, and acts towards the final SP value.

• When the REMOTE mode is switched to the LOCAL mode

When the “currently used SP” is read during SP gradient, the SP value on the

gradient is read.

When the “currently used SP” is read during the MANUAL or READY modes, or

during AT execution, the target SP (final SP) is read.

Handling PrecautionsThe time accuracy is ±1% of the set time. Pay attention to this duringprolonged operation.

Item

Cold junctioncompensationaction

Description

0: Internal1: External

Factory Setting

0: Internal

User Level

M

Related setting item: Input type

Item

Lower SP limit

Upper SP limit

Description

PV range lower value toupper SP limit value

Lower SP limit value to PVrange upper value

Factory Setting

PV range lowerlimit

PV range upperlimit

User Level

S/M

Item

SP downgradient

SP up gradient

SP gradienttime unit

Description

0 to 10000

0 to 10000

0: unit/min1: unit/h

Factory Setting

0

0

0

User Level

M

8-8

Control Output

Control methodSelect the control method from the following:

(For details, see “Appendix, Advice on Control Constants.”)

• ON/OFF control:

By this control method, PV reaches the SP value and PV is repeatedly switched

ON and OFF. This control method is used when not much priority is given to

controllability as a certain degree of overshoot and undershoot occur.

Handling PrecautionsIn actual fact, a certain fixed gap called a “differential” is providedduring ON/OFF switching to avoid frequent ON/OFF operation of thecontrol device. The value of this differential can be set within the range1 to 9999unit.

• Control by self-tuning:

By this control method, the controller automatically tunes the control constants

to achieve a stable state when hunting occurs when the SP value is changed or

when the control characteristics change.

• Control by PID fixed values:

By this control method, control is performed based upon PID control constants

set by auto-tuning or set on the loader. As PID constants are not changed as

long as they are not operated, the PID constants must be operated when control

is disturbed when the SP value is changed or when the characteristics of the

control target change.


Control actionSet whether or not to use the DMC10 for heat or cooling control.

• Heat control: By this control method, the manipulated variable is decreased

(or turned OFF) accompanying the increase in PV value. This

control method is also called “reverse action” as the change in

PV value and manipulated variable are in a non-proportional

relationship.

• Cooling control: By this control method, the manipulated variable is increased

(or turned ON) accompanying the increase in PV value. This

control method is also called “direct action” as the change in

PV value and manipulated variable are in a directly

proportional relationship.

Item

Control method

Description

0: ON/OFF control1: Control by self-tuning2: Control by PID fixed

values

Factory Setting

0: ON/OFF control

User Level

E/S/M

Item

Control action

Description

0: Heat control (reverse action)

1: Cooling control(direct action)

Factory Setting

0: Heat control(reverse action)

User Level

E/S/M

8-9

Time proportional cycleThis item is for setting the time cycle during time proportional control. The value

obtained by applying the manipulated variable to this time becomes the ON time.

Generally, controllability improves the shorter the time proportional cycle

becomes. However, if the cycle is set to a short value, the control device tends to

be repeatedly switched ON and OFF frequently, and so the life of the control

device must be taken into consideration.

When the cycle is set to 10 seconds or more or when relay output is included in the

control operation, ON/OFF operation shorter than 200ms is not performed at all

times.


Time proportional operating modeSet the operating mode during time proportional control:

• Priority on controllability: Priority is given to controllability. When the

manipulated variable must be made to

fluctuate, control output is controlled to the

optimum value while being operated on

frequently even if control is within the time

proportional cycle.

• Priority on control device life: Only one ON/OFF operation is performed

within the time proportional cycle even if the

manipulated variable is fluctuating greatly to

avoid frequent operation of the control device.

Handling PrecautionsWe recommend using the time proportional operating mode incombination with lengthening the time proportional cycle to reduce theoperating frequency of the control device.

PID initial MVThis is the initial manipulated variable when the power is turned ON, when the

READY (control stopped state) is switched to the RUN (control in progress)

mode, or when the SP value has been changed.

Item

Timeproportionalcycle

Description

5 to 120s (relay output)1 to 120s (voltage pulse

output)

Factory Setting

10s

User Level

E/S/M

Related setting item: Control method

Item

Timeproportionaloperating mode

Description

0: Priority on controllability1: Priority on control device

life

Factory Setting

0: Priority oncontrollability

User Level

E/S/M


Item

PID initial MV

Description

–10.0 to +110.0%

Factory Setting

0.0%

User Level

M

8-10

AUTO/MANUAL switching actionThis item is for setting the action when the AUTO (automatic control) mode is

switched to MANUAL (forced output of a fixed manipulated variable) mode.

The DMC10 has a function for forcibly outputting any manipulated variable set in

addition to automatic control. This function can be used, for example, to check

operation of a control device while it is running or to hold the temperature of a

control device at a fixed output.

• Preset: Any manipulated variable is output when the MANUAL mode is

switched to. The manipulated variable at this time is set in the preset

manual value item.

• Bumpless: The manipulated variable in the automatic control mode before

switching was performed is used as the default.


Handling PrecautionsThe MANUAL mode cannot be switched to when the control method isset to ON/OFF control.

Preset manual valueWhen the action when the MANUAL mode is switched to the AUTO mode is set

to preset, set the manual value (manipulated variable) when switching is

performed.

MV in READY modeThis item is for setting the manipulated variable in the READY (control stopped

state) mode not to 0% but to a fixed value. This item is used, for example, in the

case of devices that require a certain degree of remaining heat even if control is

stopped.

MV at PV alarm occurrenceThis item is for setting the manipulated variable when an alarm occurs for the PV

input due to a sensor malfunction or line break.

Item

AUTO/MANUALswitching action

Description

0: Bumpless1: Preset

Factory Setting

0: Bumpless

User Level

S/M

Related setting item: Preset manual value, Control method

Item

Preset manualvalue

Description

–10.0 to +110.0%

Factory Setting

0.0%

User Level

S/M

Related setting item: AUTO/MANUAL switching action

Item

MV in READYmode

Description

–10.0 to +110.0%

Factory Setting

0.0%

User Level

M

Item

MV at PV alarmoccurrence

Description

–10.0 to +110.0%

Factory Setting

0.0%

User Level

M

8-11

MV rate-of-change limitThis item is used to suppress fluctuations in the manipulated variable to a fixed

manipulated variable or less. It is used when sudden output fluctuations from the

controller adversely influence the control device or processing target. Set the limit

as the maximum amount of change of the manipulated variable for each output

updating cycle, or in the case of the DMC10, the maximum amount of change per

0.5 seconds.

SP valuePV value

Correction width

Self-tuning startup


Self-tuning up/down startup conditionThis function disables startup of self-tuning when the PV value is moving down

when self-tuning is in use. Use this function for control targets when the

characteristics of temperature rise differ greatly from those during temperature

fall, and controllability is not required when temperature falls.

Self-tuning correction widthThis is the deviation width for starting up self-tuning. When this width is set to

“0”, self-tuning by deviation does not start up. (Self-tuning by SP change is started

up.)

The self-tuning correction width is set to “0” in the following applications:

• In the case of interference devices (e.g. instruments that are easily influenced by

changes in the temperature of adjacent (up, down, left, right) control targets)

• In the case of devices where disturbance is generated intermittently (e.g.

packaging equipment)

Item

MV rate-of-change limit

Description

0.1 to 100.0%

Factory Setting

100.0%

User Level

M

Item

Self-tuningup/down startupcondition

Description

0: Start at both rise and fallof PV value

1: Start at rise of PV value

Factory Setting

0: Start at bothrise and fall ofPV value

User Level

M


Item

Self-tuningcorrection width

Description

Thermocouple/RTD: 0.0 to 5.0°C

DC voltage/DC current: 0.0 to 3.0%FS

Factory Setting

2.0°C

0.5%FS

User Level

M

8-12

SP and Control Parameters

SP valueThis item is for setting the control set point.

The DMC10 holds up to 16 SP values (total of all channels). The SP values can be

switched by communications or external switch input. When multiple SP values

are used on single channels, “use multi-SP” in “special functions” must be set.


Proportional band (P), Reset time (I), Rate time (D)This item is for setting control constants proportional band (P), reset time (I), and

rate time (D). These constants are automatically set matched to the characteristics

of the control target when self-tuning or auto-tuning is used.

Enter these constants manually when the optimum values are already known or

when it is difficult to produce the desired effect by self-tuning or auto-tuning.

MV lower value (OL), MV upper value (OH)This item is for setting the upper and lower values of the manipulated variable.

Manual reset value (rE)A deviation occurs between PV and SP when reset time (I) is set to 0 second.

This item is used when a fixed manipulated variable is adjusted to make PV and

SP correspond in order to eliminate this deviation (difference between PV and SP).

This item can be set when the control method is set to 1 or 2 (control by PID fixed

values) and reset time (I) is set to 0 second.

Item

SP value

Description

Lower SP limit value toUpper SP limit value

Factory Setting

0

User Level

E/S/M

Item

Proportionalband (P)

Reset time (I)

Rate time (D)

Description

0.1 to 999.9%

0 to 3600s

0 to 1200s

Factory Setting

5.0%

120s

30s

User Level

E/S/M


Item

MV lower value(OL)

MV upper value(OH)

Description

–10 to MV upper value

MV lower value to 110%

Factory Setting

0%

100%

User Level

M


Item

Manual resetvalue

Description

–10 to +110%

Factory Setting

50%

User Level

S/M

Related setting item: Control method, Reset time

DifferentialThis item is for setting the difference between the ON point and OFF point during

ON/OFF control. This item is for avoiding repeatedly turning the control device

ON and OFF frequently. Note, however, that the PV value fluctuates greatly and

controllability deteriorates if this item is set to too large a value.

PV when Quick-FiTTER is running

Regular PV

Time

Max. effect

Temperature restoration and reaction overshoot when a disturbance occurs can suppressed so that a stable state can be restored as quickly as possible.


Disturbance response coefficient (Quick-FiTTER)This item is used to quicken restoration to a stable state to suppress overshoot

when disturbance of the same pattern occurs at a fixed cycle. The effect of this

item increases the larger the value is set, and the PV value is restored slowly and

smoothly.

Quick-FiTTER can be used only when the control method is set to control by fixed

PID values.

Communications

Transmission speedThis item determines the transmission speed. Normally, we recommend use at the

fastest speed of 19200bps. Change the transmission speed before use if the

specifications of the communications host device prevent communications from

being performed successfully.

Handling PrecautionsDo not connect an external terminator as the DMC10 has a built-inresistor equivalent to a terminator. Connecting an external terminatorwill prevent communications.

Item

Differential

Description

1 to 9999unit

Factory Setting

5unit

User Level

S/M


Item

Disturbanceresponsecoefficient

Description

0 to 30

Factory Setting

0

User Level

M

Item

Transmissionspeed

Description

0: 2400bps1: 4800bps2: 9600bps3: 19200bps

Factory Setting

3: 19200bps

User Level

E/S/M

8-13

8-14

Data formatThis item is for setting the format of the communications data. Select the format

matched to the specifications of the communications host device.


Min. communications response timeThis item is for setting the minimum standby time after a command is received up

to return of the response. Though a shorter setting will speed up communications,

the setting must be changed to a longer setting when a certain degree of standby

time is required depending on the specifications of the communications host

device or converter.

Min. communications response time added Value(ms)The response time set in this parameter is added to the value set for min.

communications response time; the total time is the actual min. communications

time.

(Example) Setting for min. communications response time = 1 (10 ms)

Setting for min. communications response time added value = 50 (ms)

Total min. communications response time = 60 ms

Other

Memory protectionThis function is for prohibiting changes to specific communications parameters.

Changes are possible in the loader regardless of the following:

SP: SP values, SP set number

MODE: RUN/READY, AUTO/MANUAL, auto-tuning start/stop,

LOCAL/REMOTE

Item

Data format

Description

0: 8bits, even parity, 1 stopbit

1: 8bits, no parity, 2 stopbits

Factory Setting

0: 8bits, evenparity, 1 stop bit

User Level

E/S/M

Item

Min. responsetime

Description

0: 1ms1: 10ms2: 100ms3: 200ms

Factory Setting

1: 10ms

User Level

M

Item

Memoryprotection

Description

0: All writable1: Only SP, EV, MODE and

communications DIwritable

2: Only SP, MODE andcommunications DIwritable

3: Not writable exceptmemory protection

Factory Setting

0: All writable

User Level

E/S/M

8-15

LED operation typeThis function is for setting the operation of the POWER lamp on the front panel of

the DMC10. Set this item to check the running state during trial running, for

example, by the lit/blinking state of the LEDs. Normally, the LED lights at all

times when the power is ON.


*1: By this setting, the LED blinks for the value of the SP number.*2: By this setting, the LED blinks only during reception at the self device address.

Channel targeted for LED operationThis item is for setting the channel number targeted for operation when the

content set in the LED operation type relates to channel designation.

Item

LEDoperationtype

Description0: Lit at all times1: Blinking in READY mode2: Blinking in MANUAL mode3: Blinking in RSP mode4: Blinking at self-tuning correction standby 5: Blinking at execution of auto-tuning6: Blinking at PV alarm occurrence7: Blinking at memory alarm occurrence8: SP set selection number blinking *19: Blinking during master communications *210: Blinking during master/loader

communications11: Control output mode

(lit when ON)12: Event output mode

(lit when ON)13: Event bus output switch mode

(lit when ON)14: External switch input mode

(lit when ON)15: External bus mode

(lit when ON)16: Communications DI input mode

(lit when ON)17: Blinking during inter-channel deviation

control18: Blinking during SP gradient time19: Blinking during inference of motor control

position

Factory Setting

0: Lit at all times

User Level

M

Related setting item: Channel targeted for LED operation

Item

Channeltargeted forLED operation

Description

0: OR operation on allchannels

1: channel 12: channel 23: channel 34: channel 4

Factory Setting

1: channel 1

User Level

M

Related setting item: LED operation type

• The set content varies according to the LED operation type.• The setting is invalid when the LED operation type is not related to a

channel. The setting is invalid when the LED operation type is set asfollows:7: Blinking at memory alarm occurrence9: Blinking during host communications10: Blinking during host/loader communication

8 - 3 Detailed Explanation of Option Functions

Event OutputThe DMC10 is provided with the following event outputs:• 4 event relay outputs (in case of models w/ options)• 4 event bus outputs (all models)By output of these events, the operation state (ON/OFF state) can be read bycommunications.For details, see “Appendix, 2.Advice on Events.”

Handling PrecautionsEvent Bus OutputThis is event output that can be output from the relays of the eventoutput module via the bus line inside the DMC10 base.Event bus output is used when physical relay output is required on a 4-channel model that does not have event relay output or when manyevent outputs are required even on a 2-channel model.Event bus output can also be used as an internal bit signal even ifthere is no event output module.

Operation type


Item Range

Main

–

–2000 to+10000–2000 to+10000–2000 to

Sub

–2000 to+10000

–2000 to+10000

0 to10000

–2000 to+10000

–2000 to+10000

–2000 toSub

–

–

–

–

Sub

–

–

–

Main to10000

–

–

0 to10000

–

–

Main to10000

–

–

–

–

HYS

–

0 to100000 to

100000 to

10000

0 to10000

0 to10000

0 to10000

0 to10000

0 to10000

0 to10000

–

–

–

–

ON Delay(h:min:s)

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

OFF Delay(h:min:s)

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

ch

1 to 6

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 to 6

1 to 6

1 to 6

1 to 6

–

∆

∆

∆

–

–

–

–

Sta

ndby

Latc

h

Dire

ct/r

ever

seac

tion

Ala

rm

Action

0: No event

1: PV upperlimit

2: PV lowerlimit

3: PVupper/lowerlimit

4: Deviationupper limit(currentreferenceSP)

5: Deviationlower limit(currentreferenceSP)

6: Deviationupper/lowerlimit(currentreferenceSP)

7: Inter-channeldeviationupper limit

8: Inter-channeldeviationlower limit

9: Inter-channeldeviationupper/lowerlimit

10:READYmode

11:MANUALmode

12:Controlaction(direct)

13:Auto-tuningstartupmode

Event output is always OFF.Event output is forcibly turned OFFeven if the latch was being used.Action on PV value

Action on PV value

Action on PV value

Action on deviation between SP andPV



Action on deviation between PVvalues of two different channels



The event turns ON when the READYmode is entered.The event turns ON when theMANUAL mode is entered.The event turns ON when the controlaction becomes direct action (coolingcontrol).The event turns ON when auto-tuningstarts, and is ON until auto-tuningends.

8-16

∆: Though the normal standby action can be used, the standby action at the time of SP change cannot be used.When a standby action is used in a deviation event, use the event type number 25, 26 or 27.

• When “no function” is selected, the event calculation result (event output) is “0” at all times.• The channel setting range is as follows:

1 to 4: Designation of PV channel5: OR operation on all existing channels6: AND operation on all existing channels

• The channel of the current transformer is displayed for the channel of heater-related events (items 17, 18).• “–” in the table indicates parameters that do not require setting.

(These parameters can be written, even though they do not have any meaning.)Event setting value = –2000 to +10000, channels 1 to 6, direct/reverse = 0 to 1 do not influence DMC10functions even if they are set.

• Enter a value 10X the actual power supply value as the main, sub and HYS of event operation types 17 and 18.Ex: Becomes 115 in case of 11.5A.


Item Range

Main

–

0 to10000

–

0 to Sub

0 to 500

–

–

–

–2000 to+10000–2000 to+10000–2000 to

Sub

–2000 to+10000

–2000 to+10000

0 to10000

–

–

–2000 to +10000

Sub

–

–2000 to+10000

–

Main to500

–

–

–

–

–

–

Main to10000

–

–

0 to10000

–

–

–

HYS

–

0 to10000

–

0 to 500

0 to 500

–

–

–

0 to100000 to

100000 to

10000

0 to10000

0 to10000

0 to10000

–

–

0 to10000

ON Delay(h:min:s)

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

OFF Delay(h:min:s)

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

00:00:00 to99:59:59

ch

1 to 6

1 to 4

1 to 6*1

1 to 2

1 to 2

1 to 6

–

1 to 6

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 to 6

1 to 6

1 to 4

–

–*2

–

–

∆

∆

∆

Sta

ndby

Latc

h

Dire

ct/r

ever

seac

tion

Ala

rm

Action

14: Self-tuningcorrectionstandbymode

15: Loopdiagnosis

16: Timer

17: Heater linebreak/over-current

18: Heatershort-circuit

19: Individualchannel, PValarm

20: Memoryalarm

21: LOCAL

22: SP upperlimit

23: SP lowerlimit

24: SPupper/lowerlimit

25: Deviationupper limit(finalreferenceSP)

26: Deviationlower limit(finalreferenceSP)

27: Deviationupper/lowerlimit (finalreferenceSP)

28: SP gradientin progress

29: Inference ofmotor controlposition inprogress

30: Loopdiagnosis 2

The event turns ON when self-tuning isstarted with control by self-tuning in anexecuting state, and stays ON until thecontrol constants are calculated.

-

ON delay action: Event output turns ONwhen a preset time has elapsed afterthe signal (external switch input orinternal bit) for timer startup has turnedON.OFF delay action: Event output turnsOFF when a preset time has elapsedafter the signal (external switch input orinternal bit) for timer startup has turnedOFF.*1 Designate the PV channel on which

the READY mode is monitored whenthe event has turned OFF in theREADY mode.

*2 Be sure to set to “0”.Action on current transformer value.Action only when MV=ON

Action on current transformer value.Action only when MV=OFFAction on alarm state. The event turnsON while the alarm of the set PVchannel is ON.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

–

8-17

ON HYS

Inter-channel deviationMain

ONHYS

MainInter-channel deviation

ONHYS

PVMain

ON HYS

PVMain

8-18

Operation for each event typeIncluding that value

Not including that value


Item0: No event

1: PV upperlimit

2: PV lowerlimit

3: PVupper/lowerlimit

4: Deviationupper limit

5: Deviationlower limit

6: Deviationupper/lowerlimit

7: Inter-channeldeviationupper limit

8: Inter-channeldeviationlower limit

9: Inter-channeldeviationupper/lowerlimit

Direct action Reverse actionWhen no function is set, event output turns OFF even if other settings are made.Note, however, that the latch is not released even if the event type = 0.

Same action as PV lower limit/reverse action Same action as PV lower limit/direct action

ON HYS

PVMain

ONHYS

PVMain

ON HYS

PVMain

ONHYS

Sub

ONHYS

PVMain

HYS

Sub

Same action as deviation lower limit/reverse action Same action as deviation lower limit/direct action

ONHYS

PVSP+Main

ON HYS

PVSP+Main

Same action as event type = 4 (deviation upperlimit)/reverse action

Same action as deviation upper limit/direct action

ON HYS

PVSP+Main

ONHYS

SP+MainPV

Same action as PV upper/lower limit/reverse action

ON HYS

PVMain

ONHYS

Sub

SP

ONHYS HYS

PVMain Sub

SP

The inter-channel deviation is calculated as follows:

Channel 2-channel 4-channelDesignation model model

1 PV1–PV2 PV2–PV22 PV2–PV1 PV2–PV33 Not settable PV3–PV44 Not settable PV4–PV1

Same action as deviation lower limit/reverse action Same action as deviation lower limit/direct action

ONHYS

Inter-channel deviationMain

ON HYS

MainInter-channel deviation

The inter-channel deviation is calculated in the same wayas the inter-channel calculation target.Action is the same as upper limit/reverse action.

Action is the same as upper limit/direct action.

ON HYS ONHYS

Main Sub

Inter-channel deviation

ONHYS HYS

Main Sub

Inter-channel deviation

Same action as PV upper limit/reverse action Same action as PV upper limit/direct action

NotesSet “0” for operationin READY mode.

-

Set “0” as thestandby setting.

-

-

8-19


Item10:READY

mode

11:MANUALmode

12:Controlaction(direct)

13:Auto-tuningstartupmode

14:Self-tuningcorrectionstandbymode

15:Loopdiagnosis

Direct actionWhen the READY mode isenteredThe event state turns ON.

When the MANUAL mode isenteredThe event state turns ON.

When control becomes directactionThe event state turns ON.

When auto-tuning is startedThe event state turns ON.

During self-tuning correctionstandbyThe event state turns ON.

Channel Designation1 to 4: Individual channel

designation5: OR operation on all

channels6: AND operation on

all channels1 to 4: Individual channel












all channels

Reverse actionThe reverse of direct action isoutput.

The reverse of direct action isoutput.




This event turns ON when no changes in PV value are seen even though control output is ON.This is used to detect malfunctioning of the control device. Setup items

• Main setting: Control output value• Sub setting: PV value• ON delay time: Diagnosis time (in case of loop diagnostic event)

Use of actionThis turns ON when the PV value set in the sub setting is not reached within the diagnosis time even though a controloutput value of main setting value or greater is held for the diagnosis time.

Heat control Cooling control Standby settingprohibited

Condition 1PV sub (PV)

Condition 2Condition 2

MV main (MV)

Condition 3 ON delay setup timeEV

When area conditions 1 and 2 for satisfying the event ON conditions are established, the ON delay is started.

Condition 1

PV main (PV)

MV main (MV)

Condition 3 ON delay setup timeEV

When area conditions 1 and 2 for satisfying the event ON conditions are established, the ON delay is started.

Condition 2Condition 2

1 to 4: Individual channeldesignation

8-20


NotesItem16:Timer

17:Heater linebreak/over-current

18:Heatershort-circuit

19: Individualchannel,PV alarm

20:Memoryalarm

21:LOCAL

22:SP upperlimit

23:SP lowerlimit

24:SPupper/lowerlimit

Direct action Channel DesignationReverse action

Same action as SP lowerlimit/reverse action


Other casesThe timer starts again from the ON delay default as the timer down counter is reset if the power is turned OFF and thenback ON, or if the timer setting value is changed.

• Action of ON delay timer • Action of OFF delay timer

ON

ON

Timer event output

External switch input or bus external switch input

ON

ON

Timer event output

External switch input or bus external switch input

ON delay setup time (S)

OFF delay setup time (S)

Time Time

The timer turns ON when the ON delay time has elapsed after the startup signal has turned ON.The timer turns OFF when the OFF delay timer has elapsed after the startup signal has turned OFF.The “startup signal” here refers to DI such as an external switch input or internal bus

This item operates when a current of the main setting value or more is measured by the current transformer input whilecontrol output = ON, or when only a current of the sub setting value or less flowed.

ON HYS

Current

Main

ONHYS

Sub

ONHYS HYS

Current

Main Sub

1: channel 12: channel 2


This item operates when a current of the event setting value or more flows while control output=OFF.

ONHYS

Current

Main

ON HYS

MainCurrent

1: channel 12: channel 2



6: AND operation onall channels

Not designated




-

-

-


-

-

-

-

-

-

Sets the PV ALARM of individualchannels. (PV upper/lower limitalarm, B line break alarm)

Device memory alarms(parameter area RAM checksum,adjustment area EEPROM, RAMchecksum) and PV alarms (PVupper limit alarm, lower limitalarm, CJ error, B line breakalarm) are targeted, and theevent turns ON even if one of thealarms occurs.When local SP is used, the eventstate becomes “1”.


Same action as SP upperlimit/reverse action

Same action as SP upperlimit/reverse action


Same operation as SP lowerlimit/direct action

Same operation as SP upperlimit/direct action

Same operation as SP upperlimit/direct action

ONHYS

SPMain

ON HYS

Main SP

ON HYS

SPMain

ONHYS

SPMain

ON HYS

PVMain

ONHYS

SubSP

Main Sub

ONHYS HYS

PVSP

8-21


Notes-

-

-

-

-

Item25:Deviation

upper limit(finalreferenceSP)

26:Deviationlower limit(finalreferenceSP)

27:Deviationupper/lowerlimit (finalreferenceSP)

28:SPgradient inprogress

29:Inferenceof motorcontrolposition inprogress

30:Loopdiagnosis 2

Direct action Channel Designation-

-

-




1 to 2

Reverse action

During SP gradient operation, theevent state becomes “1”.


ONHYS

PVSP+Main

ON HYS

PVSP+Main

ON HYS

PVSP+Main

ONHYS

SP+MainPV

ON HYS

PVMain

ONHYS

SubSP

Main Sub

ONHYS HYS

PVSP

Same action as deviation lowerlimit/reverse action

Same action as deviation lowerlimit/direct action

Same action as deviation upperlimit/reverse action

Same action as deviation upperlimit/direct action

During the inference of motorcontrol position, the event statebecomes "1".


Becomes ON when PV does not change though the control output has been turned ON.Used to detect a failure in a operation terminal.This is different from 15: Loop diagnosis in terms of event ON conditions for PV. Setting items

• Main setting value: MV• Sub setting value: None• Hysteresis: Deviation from the PV value at the time when the MV has surpassed the main setting value

Action specifications• Becomes ON when the MV is held above the main setting value and the PV has not reached [the PV value at the

time when the MV has surpassed the main setting value] plus (minus) [the hysteresis setting value] within thediagnostic time (ON delay time).

PV(PV)

MV

EV Low(MV)

EV

The area satisfying the event ON condition.ON delay starts when both the conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied.

Hys(PV)Condition 1

Condition 2

Condition 2

Condition 3On delay setting time

The area satisfying the event ON condition.ON delay starts when both the conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied.

PV(PV)

MV

EV Low(MV)

EV

Hys(PV)

Condition 1

Condition 2

Condition 2

Condition 3On delay setting time

In case of heat control In case of cool control - -

8-22


NoteEvent ON delay

An event operation whose condition (exceeding an upper temperature limit, for

example) has been satisfied is not activated until a set time has elapsed.

Event setting value

Event input

ON delay time

ON

OFF

Time

PV

PV

Target channelDesignate the channel targeted for event operation.

• The meaning of the target channel is divided into PV channel and current

transformer channel depending on the event type.

• When 5 can be set, all channels are ORed.

• When 6 can be set, all channels are ANDed.

• When PV ALARM OR is set at the same time, the setting of the target channel

becomes PV channel selection on PV ALARM OR at the same time. (PV

ALARM OR cannot be set separately from the event setting type.)

• In the case of event types for which the target channel need not be set, 1 to 8 can

be set, though operation is not influenced even if a target channel is set.

Item

Target channel

Description

1 or 2 (in case of 2-channelmodels)1 to 4 (in case of 4-channelmodels)

Factory Setting

EV1/EV_BUS1→1EV2/EV_BUS2→2EV3/EV_BUS3→3EV4/EV_BUS4→4

User Level

E/S/M

Alarm OR actionWhen a PV-related alarm for all existing PV channels or a device memory alarm

occurs, the state of that event type is ORed to turn the event ON.

When the event type is set to “0”, each of the parameters for the event setting

becomes an ALARM OR exclusive setting. By this ALARM OR action, this

setting is ignored and output even if standby is set to “ON”. Accordingly, if

standby was set to “ON” and the PV alarm occurred immediately after the power

was turned ON, the event immediately turns ON (in the case of direct action).

Even if reverse action is set, ALARM OR events become direct action at all times.

However, in case of standby ON, when changed to READY state, the event

becomes OFF.

Item

Device alarmOR operation

Description

0: None1: OR operation used

Factory Setting

0: None

User Level

M

8-23


Event setting value (main)This is the setting value of the event. The setting value becomes the lower limit

value when two values, upper and lower limit, are set according to the event type.

Event setting value (sub)This is the setting value of the event. The setting value becomes the upper limit

value when two values, upper and lower limit, are set according to the event type.

HysteresisThis is the difference between the ON point and OFF point. Use this item to set a

value of a certain extent to prevent frequent turning ON and OFF of the event

output.

Direct/reverseThe direct/reverse setting is used to reverse (invert an ON/OFF relationship) the

operation of the set event.

Item

Event settingvalue (main)

Description


Factory Setting

0

User Level

E/S/M

Item

Event settingvalue (sub)

Description


Factory Setting

1000

User Level

E/S/M

Item

Hysteresis

Description

0 to 10000

Factory Setting

5

User Level

S/M

Item

Direct/reverse

Description

0: Direct action1: Reverse action

Factory Setting

0: Direct

User Level

E/S/M

Handling Precautions• Direct operation of the PV upper limit and deviation upper limit is the same

as the reverse limit of PV lower limit and deviation lower limit operation.[Example] Event operation type setting: 3 (PV upper and lower limits)

Direct/reverse action setting: 1 (reverse)

ONHYS

PVMain

HYS

Sub

ONOFF

• When using the PV, deviation upper/lower limit and heater linebreak/overcurrent and control device short-circuit alarm, set HYS so that theOFF point is not lost.

ON HYS

PVMain

ONHYS

Sub

ON HYS

PVMain

ONHYS

Sub

Bad setting Correct setting

8-24


StandbyThe standby function prevents an event from turning ON, even when the ONcondition of that event is satisfied at controller power ON or when the READYmode changes to the RUN mode.Standby is activated when an ON condition is satisfied after an OFF condition hasbeen satisfied.With “2: Standby + standby at SP change,” standby is reset when the SP ischanged (SP value is changed or SP set number is changed) in addition to thefunction of “1: Standby.”

LatchOnce event output is ON, the latch function holds an event in the ON state evenwhen an OFF condition is satisfied. Follow the procedure below to reset the latchfunction at the event OFF condition:• Set “Latch Release” to the external switch input and turn the external switch

ON.• Turn the power OFF and back ON again.• Send the latch release message. (See 1109W on page 10-18.)

Action in READY modeSet this item to prevent operation of event output when the controller is in the

READY mode.

Item

Standby

Description

0: None1: Standby2: Standby + standby at SP change

Factory Setting

0: None

User Level

S/M

Item

Latch

Description

0: None1: Latch operation

Factory Setting

0: None

User Level

M

Item

Action inREADY mode

Description

0: Action continued in READY mode1: Action forcibly turned OFF in

READY mode

Factory Setting

0: Actioncontinued inREADY mode

User Level

M

8-25


Current Transformer Input2-channel models of the DMC10 are provided with a current transformer input

function for measuring the current value of a heater. Monitoring the current value

flowing to the heater allows you to detect line breaks or overcurrent, and the short-

circuit state of control devices such as relays.

Target channelDesignate the target channel for current transformer input.

As current transformer is designated to each channel as the default, this setting

need not be changed when the controller is used on a single-phase power supply.

To use the controller on a 3-phase power supply, designate the target channel by

this setting item.

Control output

Heater current

Time

Measurement standby time Current cycle

Measurement standby timeThis item is for setting the time from when control output turns ON up to when

measurement of the current value is started.

When a heater line break or overcurrent is detected, the error state is monitored by

measuring the current value when the heater is in an ON state. Set this time to a

longer value when a large value is detected due to rush current immediately after

the control output has turned ON due to the load on the application.

When the ON time of the control output is short, change the setting to reduce the

time until measurement.

Formula for calculating the standby timeStandby time (ms) = Setting value x 10

Item

Target channel

Description

1: OUT12: OUT23: EV14: EV25: EV36: EV4

Factory Setting

CT1→1CT2→2

User Level

M

Item

Measurementstandby time

Description

3 to 30 (x 10ms)

Factory Setting

3

User Level

E/S/M

External Switch InputWhen this model supports options, up to four external switch inputs can be used as

external switch input functions. On all DMC10 models, four event outputs

(EV_BUS1 to EV_BUS4) can be used in the same way as external switch bus

inputs (RSW_BUS1 to RSW_BUS4).

NoteEvent bus outputs can be used as external switch bus inputs.

Though event bus outputs can also be output from the DMC10 as inputs to an

event output module, event bus outputs can be used instead of external switch bus

inputs as they are internally on the DMC10.

This function enables the following:

• The control output of another channel or all channels is taken as OFF (READY

mode) by occurrence of an alarm on a certain channel.

• Control of another channel or all channels is started (READY mode changed to

RUN mode) after a certain channel has reached a fixed temperature.

• Control of another channel or all channels is started (RUN mode) or stopped

(READY mode) after a fixed time has elapsed.

Type of actionThis item is for setting the action that functions according to external switch input

or event output. The same operation can be designated to individual channels and

to all channels that are the target of the action.

The action condition for external switch inputs is input at all levels. To continue

the action, the input must be held.

Normally, the DMC10 is used in direct action. However, when reverse action is

set, the ON and OFF action can be switched. When reverse action is set, the ON

and OFF action in descriptions is reversed.

8-26


Item

Type of action

Description

0: No function1: “1” added to SP set number2: “2” added to SP set number3: “4” added to SP set number4: RUN/READY5: AUTO/MANUAL6: LOCAL/REMOTE7: Auto-tuning stop/start8: Self-tuning stop/execution9: Timer stop/start10: Release latch state of actual

output of event11: Inter-channel deviation

control switching12: Inter-channel deviation

control type13: External switch input state14: SP lamp stop

Target channel

0: All channels1 to 4: Individual

channels orevent outputs1 to 4

5 to 8: Bus output

User Level

E/S/MDirect/reverse



8-27

0: No functionThe controller does not function at all even if the assigned external switch

input is ON. Note, however, that the ON/OFF state of the assigned external

switch input can be read by communications. For this reason, these ON/OFF

states can be used for capturing the ON/OFF states of alarms and monitor

switches.1: “1” added to SP set number2: “2” added to SP set number3: “4” added to SP set number

The DMC10 can hold up to 16 SP values (eight per channel on 2-channelmodels and four per channel on 4-channel models).This item is used to switch these SP values.Switching of SP values is as follows according to the number if input pointsused.1 input: SP1/SP22 inputs: SP1 to SP43 inputs: SP1 to SP8

4: RUN/READYThis item is used for switching between the RUN (control) mode and theREADY (control stopped) mode.

5: AUTO/MANUALThis item is used for switching the controller from the AUTO (automaticcontrol) mode to the MANUAL (manual operation) mode. For details onrelated settings, see page 8-10.

Handling PrecautionsThe mode cannot be switched to MANUAL when the control method isON/OFF control.

6: LOCAL/REMOTEThis item can be used on advanced model DMC10D.This item is used for switching control by local SP to SP by remote SP input.

Item

1 point2 points

3 points

Description

External switch input 1External switch input 1External switch input 2External switch input 1External switch input 2External switch input 3

SP8

SP7

X

SP6

X

SP5

X

X

SP4

X

SP3

X

X

X

SP2

X

X

X

SP1X

X

X

X

X

X

The number of the external switch inputs in the above table may differ. : ON, X: OFF

External switch input

Device state

OFF

RUN

ON

READY


Device state

OFF

AUTO

ON

MANUAL


Device state

OFF

LOCAL

ON

REMOTE

NoteFor the auto-tuning of heat/cool control, see Heat/cool control outputassignments on page 9-3.

8: Self-tuning start/executionThis item switches between stop and execution of self-tuning.


7: Auto-tuning stop/startThis item can be used to start and stop auto-tuning of PID constants.• When this item is turned OFF while auto-tuning has started up, tuning is

canceled.• To normally quit and re-execute auto-tuning after auto-tuning has started up,

turn the external switch input OFF then back ON again.

Handling PrecautionsTo use this function, the “Control method” setting at “Basic functions”-“Control output” must be set to “1: Control by self-tuning.”

9: Timer stop/startThis item becomes the startup signal when the event output type is taken as

the timer. When this signal turns ON, the timer count is started, and when this

signal turns OFF before the count finishes, the count stops and the count value

is reset. Though events are still active after the count has finished, the event

action and count value are reset when the startup signal turns OFF.

10: Release latch stateSet this item when using external switch input as release of the event output

latch state.

11: Inter-channel deviation control switchingThis item can be used on advanced model DMC10D.

This item is used to switch to inter-channel deviation control from regular

control.


Device state

OFF

Auto-tuning stopped

ON

Auto-tuning started


Device state

OFF

Start of self-tuningenabled

ON

Start of self-tuningforbidden


Device state

OFF

Timer count stoppedand reset

ON

Timer count started


Device state

OFF

Holding of latch stateenabled

ON

Latch state released


Device state

OFF

Regular control

ON

Inter-channel deviationcontrol

8-28

8-29


12: Inter-channel deviation control typeThis item can be used on advanced model DMC10D.

This item is used to switch between deviation control with PV value and

deviation control with SP value on peer devices as inter-channel deviation

control.


Device state

OFF

Deviation control withpeer PV value

ON

Deviation control withpeer SP value

Auxiliary Output (current output)On the DMC10, auxiliary output functions (current output) can be used on two

points as an option.

When SP gradient is being used by the SP value of the operation type, the SP

value becomes the SP value on the gradient.

The 0% and 100% settings are the settings on the output type.

[Example] In the case of output type 0 to 20mA 0% is the value at 0mA

100% is the value at 20mA

Item

Type of action

Target channel

Output type

0% setting100% setting

Description

0: PV value1: PV1-PV2 value2: SP value3: Manipulated variable4: Heat side manipulated

variable5: Cooling side manipulated

variable1 to 2

0: 4 to 20mA1: 0 to 20mA–2000 to +10000–2000 to +10000

Factory Setting

0

AUX1→1AUX2→2

0

01000

User Level

E/S/M

S/M

M

E/S/ME/S/M


Device state

OFF

0

ON

1


Device state

OFF

SP lamp being used

ON

SP lamp stopped

13: External switch input stateThis is a function only to take the external switch input signal inside the

DMC10 as is. This item is to be used as a general-purpose DI. It is used

with the event output special operation, etc.

14: SP lamp stopWhen the SP lamp is used, the lamp can be stopped using this item.

If the SP lamp is stopped while it is being used, the SP value becomes the

finally attained SP value.


8 - 4 Event Output Special Operation

In event output, output of logical calculations (AND, OR) or port signals as they are is possible by selecting eventoutput special operations in “special functions.”The following shows a list of setup parameters for event output special operations and describes these parameters:For details on the internal structure of event output special operations, see “Appendix, Advice on Events.”

Setup Parameters (only for event output special operation)

* : External bus type definitionsThe DMC10 automatically switches to time proportional operation when it transmits an output signalto an external bus (side connector). (The loader setup screen will look like the example shown below.)0:External bus assigned to be a relay for time proportional operation.1:External bus assigned to receive voltage pulse for time proportional operation.(Example) If the voltage pulse output is set to have a 2-second cycle time and it is transmitted to

an external bus (side connector) as specified by the event output assignment, the setexternal bus definition will prompt one of the following operations:• If the external bus has been assigned to act as a relay, the cycle time and dead zone

of the time proportional calculation function as a relay output. (Cycle time = 5 seconds for lowest. There will be an on/off dead zone.)

• If the external bus has been assigned to act as a voltage pulse, the cycle time anddead zone of the time proportional calculation operate as a voltage pulse output.

Note: Though the latch was provided for the setup parameters of the standard event outputs, the latch hasbeen moved to event output assignments in event output special operation.

Category Item Name Setting Range Factory Setting User RemarksLevel

Event type Type of action Same as “action type” of standard event output See page 8-3.

Target channel Same as “target channel” of standard event output See page 8-3.

Alarm OR operation Same as “alarm OR operation” of standard event output See page 8-3.

Event setting value Same as “event setting value (main)” of standard event See page 8-3.(main) output

Event setting value Same as “event setting value (sub)” of standard event See page 8-3.(sub) output

Hysteresis Same as “hysteresis” of standard event output See page 8-3.

Direct/reverse Same as “direct/reverse” of standard event output See page 8-3.

Standby Same as “standby” of standard event output See page 8-3.

ON delay time (h) Same as “ON delay (h)” of standard event output See page 8-4.

ON delay time (min) Same as “ON delay (min)” of standard event output See page 8-4.

ON delay time (s) Same as “ON delay (s)” of standard event output See page 8-4.

OFF delay time (h) Same as “OFF delay (h)” of standard event output See page 8-4.

OFF delay time (min) Same as “OFF delay (min)” of standard event output See page 8-4.

OFF delay time (s) Same as “OFF delay (s)” of standard event output See page 8-4.

Event output Output assignment 1 See detailed explanation on the following E/S/M See page 10-34.assignment pages or Table 10-8.

Output assignment 2 See detailed explanation on the following E/S/M See page 10-34.pages or Table 10-9.

Logic 0:OR 0 M -1:AND

Latch 0:OFF 0 M -1:ON (latch in ON)2:ON (latch in OFF)

Direct/reverse 0:Direct 0 M -1:Reverse

External bus type - 0:External bus assigned to 0 M -definitions * be a relay for time

proportional operation1:External bus assigned to

receive voltage pulse for time proportional operation

8-30

8-31


Detailed ExplanationThe content of each of the items in the event tables is the same as the items for

standard event outputs. For details, refer to each of these items.

Output assignments 1Of the event output special operations, this setting is for declaring which signal is

to be used when logical operations are to be used.

Two or more signals can be selected, and you can select from 32 signals in

combination with output assignments 2. Output signals check-marked on the

loader are enabled.

Output assignment 2Of the event output special operations, this setting is for declaring which signal is



combination with output assignments 1. Output signals check-marked on the

loader are enabled.

Item

Outputassignment 1

Description

EV_TBL1 internal calculation resultEV_TBL2 internal calculation resultEV_TBL3 internal calculation resultEV_TBL4 internal calculation resultEV_TBL5 internal calculation resultEV_TBL6 internal calculation resultEV_TBL7 internal calculation resultEV_TBL8 internal calculation resultExternal switch input 1External switch input 2External switch input 3External switch input 4OUT1 control calculation resultOUT2 control calculation resultOUT3 control calculation resultOUT4 control calculation result

Factory Setting

EV_TBL1→EV1EV_TBL2→EV2EV_TBL3→EV3EV_TBL4→EV4EV_TBL5→EV BUS1EV_TBL6→EV BUS2EV_TBL7→EV BUS3EV_TBL8→EV BUS4OUT1 result→OUT1OUT2 result→OUT2OUT3 result→OUT3OUT4 result→OUT4

User Level

E/S/M

Item

Outputassignment 2

Description

RSW_TBL1 internal calculation resultRSW_TBL2 internal calculation resultRSW_TBL3 internal calculation resultRSW_TBL4 internal calculation resultRSW_TBL5 internal calculation resultRSW_TBL6 internal calculation resultRSW_TBL7 internal calculation resultRSW_TBL8 internal calculation resultExternal switching bus input 1External switching bus input 2External switching bus input 3External switching bus input 4Communications DI1Communications DI2Communications DI3Communications DI4

Factory Setting

None

User Level

E/S/M

8-32


Note: The values ranging from -32768 to +32767 (i.e. 0000H to FFFFH) are writable.

However, the undefined bits do not operate because they are reserved. Always set to 0.

LogicOf the event output special operations, this item is for setting the logical value of

signals selected at output assignments 1 and output assignments 2 when logic

operations are used.

LatchOf the event output special operations, this item is for setting the latch to the

logical output of signals selected at output assignments 1 and output assignments 2.

The specifications of this setting are the same as those of the latch for standard

event output.

Direct/reverseOf the event output special operations, this item is for setting the polarity of

logical value output of the signals selected at output assignments 1 and output

assignments 2.

The specifications are the same as direct/reverse for standard event output.

Item

Logic

Description

0: OR1: AND

Factory Setting

0

User Level

M

Item

Latch

Description

0: OFF1: ON (latch in ON)2: ON (latch in OFF)

Factory Setting

0

User Level

M

Item

Direct/reverse

Description


Factory Setting

0

User Level

M

Output assignment 3Of the event output special operations, this setting is for declaring which signal is



combination with output assignments 1 and 2. Output signals check-marked on the

loader are enabled.

Item

Outputassignment 3

Description

Communications DI5Communications DI6Communications DI7Communications DI8Communications DI9Communications DI10Communications DI11Communications DI12UndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefined

Factory Setting

None

User Level

E/S/M

8-33


8 - 5 External Switch Input Special Operation

In external switch input, logical calculations (AND, OR) can be performed on signals from the input port and other

signals by selecting external switch input special operation in “special functions.”

The following shows a list of setup parameters for external switch input special operation and describes these

parameters.

For details on the internal structure of external switch input special operations, see page App.-10.

Setup Parameters (only external switch input special operations)

Detailed ExplanationThe content of each of the items in the external switch inputs is the same as the

items for standard external switch inputs. For details, refer to each of these items.

Input assignments 1Of the external switch input special operations, this setting is for declaring which

signal is to be used when logical operations are to be used.


combination with input assignments 2. Input signals check-marked on the loader

are enabled.

Item Name

Type of action

Target channel

Input assignment 1

Input assignment 2

Logic


Setting Range Factory Setting UserLevel

Remarks

See page 8-4.

See page 8-4.

See page 10-34.

See page 10-34.

-

-

Same as “action type” of standard external switchinputSame as “target channel” of standard externalswitch inputSee detailed explanation on the followingpages or Table 10-8.See detailed explanation on the followingpages or Table 10-9.0: OR1: AND0: Direct1: Reverse

0

0

E/S/M

E/S/M

M

M

Category

Externalswitchinput

Item

Inputassignment 1

Description

External switch input 1External switch input 2External switch input 3External switch input 4External switching bus input 1External switching bus input 2External switching bus input 3External switching bus input 4EV_TBL1 internal calculation resultEV_TBL2 internal calculation resultEV_TBL3 internal calculation resultEV_TBL4 internal calculation resultEV_TBL5 internal calculation resultEV_TBL6 internal calculation resultEV_TBL7 internal calculation resultEV_TBL8 internal calculation result

Factory Setting

RSW1→RSW_TBL1RSW2→RSW_TBL2RSW3→RSW_TBL3RSW4→RSW_TBL4RSW_BUS1→RSW_TBL5RSW_BUS2→RSW_TBL6RSW_BUS3→RSW_TBL7RSW_BUS4→RSW_TBL8

User Level

E/S/M

8-34


Item

Inputassignment 2

Factory Setting

None

User Level

E/S/M

Input assignments 2Of the external switch input special operations, this setting is for declaring which

signal is to be used when logical operations are to be used.


combination with input assignments 1. Input signals check-marked on the loader

are enabled.

Note: The values ranging from -32768 to +32767 (i.e. 0000H to FFFFH) are writable.

However, the undefined bits do not operate because they are reserved. Always set to 0.

Handling Precautions“Reserved” is used internally, so be sure to set to “0”.

Description

ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedEvent output 1Event output 2Event output 3Event output 4Communications DI1Communications DI2Communications DI3Communications DI4

Always set to “0”.

Input assignment 3

Item

Inputassignment 3

Description

Communications DI5Communications DI6Communications DI7Communications DI8Communications DI9Communications DI10Communications DI11Communications DI12UndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefined

Factory Setting

None

User Level

E/S/M

8-35


LogicOf the external switch input special operations, this setting is for setting the logic

of signals selected at input assignments 1 and input assignments 2 when logical

operations are to be used.

Direct/reverse

Of the external switch input special operations, this item is for setting the polarity

of logical value output of the signals selected at input assignments 1 and input

assignments 2.

The specifications are the same as direct/reverse for standard external switch

inputs.

Item

Direct/reverse

Description

0: Direct1: Reverse

Factory Setting

0

User Level

M

Item

Logic

Description

0: OR1: AND

Factory Setting

0

User Level

M

Chapter 9. SETUP PARAMETERS (DMC10D)9 - 1 Outline of the Advanced Functions

9-1

PV InputOn the advanced model DMC10D, some of the thermocouple ranges (for details,

see Range List) can be used at the No.1 decimal point. This is more effective for

detailed temperature control.

Control OutputThe following control methods have been added on the advanced model

DMC10D.

Heat/cool controlOn 2-channel advanced models (not supported on 4-channel models), two

channels’ worth of heat/cool control is possible.

Select heat/cool at “special functions” on the loader, and then make each of the

settings.

If these settings are not made, heat/cool control will not be possible on the

DMC10D. This control method cannot be used jointly with remote SP input or

inter-channel deviation control.

Inter-channel deviation controlThis control method makes the temperature of the target object uniform, and

function more effectively than conventional loop independent control in

applications that interfere with each other.

Set the channel in which this control method is to be implemented to “1” in the

internal-channel deviation control parameter in control output in the loader’s basic

functions.

Then, set the inter-channel deviation control type and inter-channel deviation

control deviation value.

Control by remote SPBy this control method, remote SP can be controlled by signals from an external

analog oscillator.

Select remote SP at “special functions” on the loader, and then make each of the

settings.

Position proportional controlAllows position proportional control using the MODUTROL MOTOR.

Select position proportional control at "special functions" on the loader. When this

function is selected, RSP control, heat/cool control, power saving and self-tuning

cannot be used simultaneously. The motor status can be checked by bit

information data (see page 10-31).

Position proportional control of the following model No. can be selected from the

loader:

9-2

Time proportional power saving modeSelect time proportional power saving mode at "special functions" on the loader.

When this function is selected, heat/cool control and inter-channel deviation

control cannot be used simultaneously.

MV branch controlResults of an arbitrary channel are applied to the normal MV calculated with PID

or a ratio or offset operation is applied to the MV.

Chapter 9. SETUP PARAMETERS (DMC10D)

Model No. Control status Position proportional control loop countDMC10D2XRXXX FB 1DMC10D4XRXXX 2DMC10D2XR01X No FB 2DMC10D2XR03X 2DMC10D4XR00X 2DMC10D2XRXXX No FB 2

(When 1-loop's worth is used)

Note) FB: Abbreviation of "Feedback wire".

9 - 2 Detailed Explanation of Basic Functions

Heat/Cool Output Assignments

Heat/cool output assignmentsThe output of each loop must be set when performing heat/cool control.

The selection content differs as I/O varies according to the model number.

9-3


Item

Heat/cool output assignment

Description

0 to 10

Factory Setting

0

User Level

E/S/M

Relationship between Setting and Output Specifications

(Any relevant function code is acceptable for in the Usable Model Numbers

column.)

Heat/cool dead zoneThis item is for setting a dead zone between heat side output and cool side outputwhen performing heat/cool control.

Cool HeatCool Heat

↑Cooling side MV

↑ Cooling side MV

↑ Heating side MV

PID MV→ PID MV→ PID MV→

100.0% 100.0%

0.0%0.0%

0.0% 50.0% 100.0%

↑ Heating side MV

100.0%

0.0%

0.0% 50.0% 100.0%

Cool Heat

↑ Heating side MV

100.0%

0.0%

0.0% 50.0% 100.0%

↑Cooling side MV

1/2 of dead zone

1/2 of dead zone

1/2 of dead zone

1/2 of dead zone

Heating/cooling dead zone = 0

Heating/cooling dead zone < 0

Heating/cooling dead zone > 0

Item

Heat/cool dead zone

Description

–100.0 to +100.0%

Factory Setting

0.10%

User Level

E/S/M

Heat/cool control ATWhen the heat/cool control AT is started, the following operations are performed.

(1) The AT is started.

(2) The AT on the Heat side is performed.

(3) When the AT on the Heat side is terminated, the same PID value as that on the

Heat side is also saved on the Cool side.

(4) Then, the AT on the Cool side is automatically started.

At this time, the output on the Heat side is also automatically output based on

the result obtained with the AT on the Heat side.

(5) When the AT on the Cool side is terminated, the PID value on the Cool side is

saved.

Handling Precautions• Before interrupting the AT of heat/cool control, set a READY state or

MANUAL state.• At the start of the AT, check that the system is not in an AUTO state

or RUN state or there is no PV alarm. In these states, the AT cannotbe started. Moreover, when the AT is in operation, if the systementers into these states the AT is stopped.

• When the AT is stopped before (3) above, the PID value before theAT is executed remains. When the AT is stopped in and after thestate in (3), a new PID result is saved.

9-4


Inter-channel Deviation Control

Inter-channel deviation controlThis parameter must be set when performing inter-channel deviation control.This parameter can be set to ON or OFF on each channel. When this parameter isset to OFF on a channel, regular control is performed on that channel.

Designated channel for inter-channel deviation controlThis item is for setting which channel is to be the reference channel whenperforming inter-channel deviation control.The channel set here becomes the reference channel, and other channels take thedeviation of this reference channel as the SP for control.

Inter-channel deviation control typeThis item is for setting whether to perform control by the deviation of PV or SP ofthe reference channel when performing inter-channel deviation control.

0: SP of control loop = PV value of designated channel + inter-channel deviation control deviation value1: SP of control loop = SP value of designated channel + inter-channel deviation control deviation value

Inter-channel deviation control deviation valueThis item is for setting the deviation value when performing inter-channeldeviation control.

Item

Inter-channel deviationcontrol

Description

0: OFF1: ON

Factory Setting

0

User Level

M

Item

Designated channel for inter-channel deviation control

Description

1 to 2 (2-channel model)1 to 4 (4-channel model)

Factory Setting

ch1→2ch2, 3, 4→1

User Level

M

Item

Inter-channel deviationcontrol action

Description

0: Designated channel PV +deviation value is taken as SP.

1: Designated channel SP +deviation value is taken as SP.

Factory Setting

0

User Level

M

Item

Inter-channel deviationcontrol deviation value

Description

–2000 to +10000

Factory Setting

0

User Level

M

9-5

Control by Remote SP• When remote SP is set at "special functions" on the loader, it is possible to

switch between remote SP and local SP (fixed SP) for each PV channel.

• Switchover between remote SP and local SP is possible by a write through

communication or external switch input.

Assignment of RSP inputWhen remote SP input is set, the following input assignment is used:

For terminals, see page 4-1.

Additional functionsThe remote SP input channel can use decimal places, range high/low limit, bias

and filter.

Handling Precautions• Match the decimal place of the remote SP input channel with the

decimal place of the channel that uses this input.• Even if +/-10% of the high/low limits of the remote SP input range is

exceeded, no input alarm similar to a PV input error is generated.• Control by remote SP cannot be used together with heat/cool control,

inter-channel deviation control or position proportional control.


Item Name Setting Range Factory Setting User LevelRemote SP input 0: Not used 0: Not used Displayed on

1: Used "special functions"Remote 0: Local SP (fixed SP) Remote SP input = 1 --(remote/local 1: Remote SP Set to "1" at the switching) time of setting

Model CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4PV OUT PV OUT PV OUT PV OUT

2 PV1 OUT1 Channel 1 Invalid -- -- -- --remote SP

4 PV1 OUT1 PV2 OUT2 Channel 1 Invalid Channel 2 Invalidremote SP remote SP

9-6

Position Proportional Control

Position proportional control setting itemsSelection by special functions of loader

Setting item before operation

Items during operation

NoteIf the type of position proportional control is directly written at word address7275W without using batch writing of the loader, set event output assignmentwith reference to the table.

Default output buffer when use of position proportional control is selected


Item Name Setting Range Factory Setting User LevelPosition proportional control 0: Not used 0 E/S/MUse/type 1: FB + inference

2: FB3: No FB4: No FB + powering on

position adjustment

Item Name Setting Range Factory Setting User LevelPosition proportional control 0: Halt/stop 0 E/S/Mautomatic adjustment 1: StartPosition proportional 0.1 to 25.0% 10.0dead zonePosition proportional 0 to 9999 1000adjustment value- Full closePosition proportional 0 to 9999 2000adjustment value- Full opneFull-open time 1 to 250s 30sPosition proportional Potentiometer full resistor value 0motor resistor value 0: Less than 400 ohm

1: 400 ohm to 1000 ohm2: 1000 ohm to 4000 ohm

Potentiometer long 0: Focused on controllability 1service life 1: Potentiometer long service life

Item Name Setting Range Factory Setting User LevelManual operation with 0: Halt 0 E/S/Mno position proportional 1 to 9999s: Operation time (s)FB in open direction

1 to 2000s: Operation time (s)in close direction

Motor feedback value -5.0% to 110.0% (read only) -- --

Model Position Proportional Channel OPEN CLOSE FB2CH CH1 MV1 MV2 PV2

CH2(No FB) MV3 MV4 --4CH CH1 MV1 MV3 PV3

CH2 MV2 MV4 PV4

9-7

When "FB" control is used• Be sure to perform automatic adjustment.• When "FB + inference" is used, inference position control is automatically set

when an error is detected in feedback input. For example, in the event ofbreakage of the feedback wire or feedback error due to deterioration of thepotentiometer, position control is continued uninterruptedly, and so thiscontrol can be used as a backup operation.

• In an inference state, the system is restored to the state in which a normalfeedback value is used only when a normal state continues under a certaincondition while the motor is running.

•The position of the motor (aperture %) can be checked.

When "No FB" is used• If "No FB" is used, position proportional control with no FB wire can be

performed.• Be sure to set "motor full-open time" before use.• For "motor full-open time", be sure to set a measured value.• When "No FB + power on position adjustment" is used, a difference between

the position of the motor and the position inferred by the instrument iseliminated by forcibly outputting a close instruction to the motor by the timeset at "motor full-open time" when power is turned on. However, a closeinstruction is stopped in MANUAL mode, READY mode or in the event of aPV alarm.

• When a MANUAL state is set, the motor does not operate with a normalmanual setting. Set to" Manual operation with No FB". The setting isperformed in time units as follows.

• Time for outputting open instruction: a positive value is written in secondunits.

• Time for outputting close instruction: a negative value is written insecond units.

• When a READY state is set, • A close instruction is retained when MV in READY state = 0• An open instruction is retained when MV in READY state > 0

• When MV = 0%, 100%, a close instruction and an open instruction are retained.

• Position proportional control automatic adjustment• When carrying out position proportional control using the FB wire, be sure to

carry out automatic adjustment after all wires are connected correctly.Adjustment can be performed also from the loader setting screen. The operationof the loader is explained in the following item.

• When adjustment is started, operation automatically shifts from motor full closeto motor full open and 3 parameters of position proportional adjustment motorfull-close value, motor full-open value and time are automatically set.

• During control with no FB, automatic adjustment is not available in aMANUAL state or READY state or in the event of FB input error. Moreover, ifthe system enters into these states during adjustment, the adjustment is stopped.

• When the adjustment is stopped, the value saved so far is retained.• When the following condition is detected, it is judged as an adjustment error

and the adjustment result is not saved. In this case, select the most suited inputtype at "Motor resistor selection".(1) Motor full-open adjustment value - motor full-close adjustment value < 100(2) Motor full-close adjustment value >= 1000


9-8

(3) Motor full-open adjustment value >= 1000(4) Motor full-open time < 5(s)

• When adjustment is not correctly completed such as the motor is stopped atsome midpoint without running to the full-close or full-open position, the"motor resistor selection" may not be correct. Change it to a different value andreadjust it.

Handling Precautions• While the position proportional control function is used, the self-

tuning function, heat/cool control, power saving function, remote SPfunction, etc. cannot be used simultaneously.

• If automatic adjustment cannot be executed because of the status ofthe apparatus, etc., try adjustment as follows.(1) Set the instrument to the full-close position, read "current FB

count (for motor adjustment)" and record it (for the wordaddresses, see the table below).

(2) Set the instrument to the full-open position. Record the timerequired to reach the full-open state and the motor adjustmentvalue at the time of full open (for the word addresses, see thetable below).

(3) Manually enter the full-close adjustment value, full-openadjustment value and full-open time at the "Automatic motoradjustment" on the loader and write to the instrument. Or writevalues at the respective word addresses.

• Position proportional operation at loader screenIt is possible to perform motor adjustment for position proportional control and

manual operations from the loader screen.


Position Proportional Position Proportional RemarksControl 1 Control 2

Current FB count value 1038W 1039W Read only(for motor adjustment)Full-close side adjustment value 7280W 7281W -Full-open side adjustment value 7282W 7283W -Full-open time 7284W 7285W -

Item Name Contents RemarksDisplay update Starts communication -

when checked.Setting Read Reads adjustment value -

from the instrument.Write Reads adjustment value -

to the instrument.Automatic Start Starts automatic adjustment. Displays when type of position adjustment proportional control = 1,2.

Stop Stops automatic adjustment. Displays when type of positionproportional control = 1,2.

Manual operation Open Outputs manual output Open. Displays when type of positionproportional control = 3,4.

Close Outputs manual output Close. Displays when type of positionproportional control = 3,4.

Off Outputs manual Off Close. Displays when type of positionproportional control = 3,4.

Auto Sets normal output. Displays when type of positionproportional control = 3,4.

Channel selection - Selects CH1 or CH2. CH2 cannot be selected when 2-channel model is used and type of position proportional control = 1,2.

Close - Closes the screen. -

9-9

• Motor automatic adjustmentOnly available when type of position proportional control = 1,2 (with feedback).

Adjustment method:

(1) Read from the setting screen.

(2) Select [Setup] [Automatic motor adjustment].(3) Select a CH number (in 2-channel model, only CH1 can be selected).

(4) Select [Adjustment] [Start]. Automatic adjustment starts.

• Motor manual operationOnly available when type of position proportional control = 3,4 (without

feedback).

Operation method:

(1) Read from the setting screen.

(2) Select [Setup] [Automatic motor adjustment].(3) Press the [Open], [Close], [Off] button.

The same processing can be performed from:

[Manual] [Open], [Manual] [Close] or

[Manual] [Off](4) Press the [Auto] button to return to the normal state.

The same processing can be performed from:

[Manual] [Auto]


9-10

• Position proportional adjustment value, motor full-close value and motor full-open valueWhen FB is used: Set by automatic adjustment, and normally need not be

set.

When FB is not used: Check that it is set to the default set value (motor full

close = 1000, motor full open = 3000).

• Full-open timeWhen FB is used: Set by automatic adjustment, and normally need not be

set.

When FB is not used: Exactly measure the time from motor full close to motor

full open and enter the value in second units.

• Position proportional motor resistor valueSet it according to the motor resistor value.

• Potentiometer long service life • When potentiometer long service life is set, control is performed by suppressing

the frequency of operating the operation terminal and attaching importance to

the life of the potentiometer.

• The optinal values of "MV rate-of-change limit" and "position proportional

dead zone" of each channel are calculated internally and used. No user-set value

is used. These user set parameters are invalidated.

• Feedback output calculationThe following output calculations are carried out:


1/4DZ 1/4DZ

OPEN instruction CLOSE instruction

MV of PID

Motor position

STOP

Dead zone(DZ)

9-11

Time Proportional Power Saving ModeOutput so that channels with time proportional output are not turned ON

simultaneously.

1/2 power savingCurrent consumption is reduced to 1/2.

In the case of the 2-channel model, the channels are not turned ON

simultaneously.

In the case of the 4-channel model, the 2 channels of each pair are not turned ON

simultaneously.

1/4 power saving (4-channel model only)Power consumption is reduced to 1/4.

The 4-channel time proportional outputs are not turned ON simultaneously.

ON

ON

ON

ON

CH1 : Time proportional output




Group

Cycle time

ON

ON

ON

ON





2-channel model

4-channel model

1

2

Cycle time


9-12

DelayIf the ON-statuses of the time proportional outputs overlap with each other due to

an operation delay of the actuator, set a delay time after the preceding channel is

turned OFF until the next channel is turned ON.

*1: 4-channel model only (do not set this for 2-channel model)*2: Set this to 1 ms or greater according to the actual instrumentation.

ON condition of each output channel• 1/2 power saving

* This is meaningful only for the 4-channel model (can be set, but in the case of a

2-channel model it operates in the same way as if "1" were selected.

• 1/4 power saving

ON

ON

ON

ONCH1

CH2

CH1

CH2

Cycle start

Cycle start

ON times do not overlap with each other.

ON times overlap with each other.

Delay timeSet the delay time so that the ON times do not overlap with each other.


Model Power Saving Group 1 Power Saving Group 2CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

2CH Preferred (master) When CH1OUT is Off. -- --(slave of CH1)

4CH Preferred (master) When CH1OUT is Off. Preferred (master) When CH3 is Off.(slave of CH1) (slave of CH3)

Model Power Saving Group 1CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

4CH Preferred (master) When CH1OUT is Off. When CH1 and When CH3 is Off.(slave of CH1) 2 are Off. (slave of CH1,2,3)

(slave of CH1,2)

Item Name Setting Range Factory Setting User LevelPower saving time 2-channel model 0 Multi-functionproportional output 0: Not used

1: Used2: Undefined *1

4-channel model0: Not used1: 1/4 power saving2: 1/2 power saving *2

Power saving delay time 0 to 1000 (ms) 10 None

9-13

Handling PrecautionsBe sure to check the following settings before using the product.• Set the cycle time of the channels of the power saving group to the

same value.• Be sure to set "operation terminal life-oriented type".• Set the default value for the logical operation setting in output

assignment of time proportional output. (Do not set And/Or orinversion).

• Use it with a fixed PID. (Do not use self-tuning.)• This function cannot be used simultaneously with heat/cool control

and position proportional control. In this case be sure to set thisfunction to "Not used".

• Be sure to set a necessary delay to absorb the delay of the actuatorwith respect to the channel to be the slave. The delay time variesdepending on the actuator used.

There are restrictions on the use as follows:• If the output of the channel to be the master is large and the output

time of the slave channel cannot fall within the cycle time, the outputis cut at the last part of the cycle time of the time proportional outputon the salve side. Thus, the control calculation result may not be fullyoutput. In such a case, set a high limit to the output with "Output highlimit" (OH) at the master channel so that the total output does notexceed 100%. Normally, the following settings are used.

In the case of 1/4 power saving, MV high limit = 25% for all channels

In the case of 1/2 power saving, MV high limit = 50% for all channels

• In Manual or Ready mode or in the event of a PV alarm, the result oftime proportional output, which is output with power saving is givenhigher priority. Therefore, depending on the MV of the channel to bethe master, the set MV may not be output.

• In the case of a relay output model, the relay may be turned OFF orON without keeping minimum ON time or minimum OFF time of 200ms.

• The sum of the control output and delay time of each channel mustbe 100% or less at the time of stabilization PV=SP. If it exceeds100%, the channel on the slave side cannot be controlled with the setvalue.

• The time proportional MV, which is actually output, is restricted whenthe set value is changed or when disturbance occurs, and so theresponse characteristic may change compared with the timeproportional output control result when power saving is not used.


9-14

MV Branch ControlAn arbitrary channel result is used on the normal MV calculated by PID or a ratio

or offset calculation is performed on the MV.

• Switching between use/not in use of this function

• Selection of channel to be output

• Ratio with respect to selected MV

• Offset with respect to selected MV

MV = (MV of selected channel) x (ratio) + (offset) limited by MV high/low

limit

As the MV of the selected channel, the value obtained by applying high/low limit

to the MV of the original channel beforehand is used.

UseIn the case of "not used" setting, the set parameters are ignored and factory

settings are forcibly used. In this case, other values stored as parameters are not

changed.

Selection of channelWhen branch control is performed, set the channel to indicate the calculation result

of the PID used.

Ratio settingSet a ratio for the MV of the selected channel.

Set value X 0.001 is used as a ratio.


PID calculation result 1




Run/Rdy1

Run/Rdy2

Run/Rdy3

Run/Rdy4

Auto/Man1

Auto/Man2

Auto/Man3

Auto/Man4

Run/Rdy1

Run/Rdy2

Run/Rdy3

Run/Rdy4

Auto/Man1

Auto/Man2

Auto/Man3

Auto/Man4

OL/OH1

OL/OH2

OL/OH3

OL/OH4

Ratio 1

Ratio 2

Ratio 3

Ratio 4

MV1

MV2

MV3

MV4

Offset 1

Offset 2

Offset 3

Offset 4

ChEn 1+

ChEn 2+

ChEn 3+

ChEn 4+

OL/OH1

OL/OH2

OL/OH3

OL/OH4

Adds the own channel PID calculation result only when "When MV branch control is used" and "Inter-channel deviation control is used" (offset canceled).

MV branch controlChannel selection/ratio/offset addition are

arbitrarily applicable to all channels.

MV before ratio calculation

1091 to 1094W

PID calculation result normal MV1020 to 1023W

Category Item Name Setting Range Factory Setting User LevelControl output Used 0: Not used 0 -

1: UsedSelect channel 1 to 4 CH1 : 1 -to be used CH2 : 2

CH3 : 3CH4 : 4

Ratio 0 to 10000 1000 Use set value x 0.001Offset -2000 to +10000 0 Use set value x 0.1

9-15

Offset settingSet the MV of an offset for the MV of the selected channel. The set value x 0.1 is

added as an offset.

Operation in Ready modeWhen the referencing channel is set to Ready, the master MV = MV in Ready

mode. Therefore, the referenced channel also carries out a calculation based on

this MV. If the referenced channels are in Ready or Manual mode, the MVs of the

respective channels in Ready mode or Manual mode are output.

Operation in Manual modeWhen the referencing channel is set to Manual and the referenced channel is

AUTO and RUN, the value is obtained by applying a ratio, offset and MV

high/low limit to the referenced channel MV = manual MV.

If the referenced channels are in Ready or Manual mode, the MVs of the

respective channels in Ready mode or Manual mode are output.

Operation combined with inter-channel deviation controlWhen "MV Branch output" and "Differential control between channels" are set at

the same time, it is possible to erase an offset that cannot be erased by adjustment

of an output ratio setting alone.

This adds the PID MV obtained by the differential control between channels

calculated by the own channel to the MV calculated by MV branch control.

When the gain of the PID calculation result of the own channel is high, the

response characteristic up to the setting improves, but the degree of interference

between zones (channels) increases in an interference system.

(Example) When CH1 is followed by CH2

CH2 setting:

• Setting of MV rate-of-change limit

CH specification: 1, ratio = 0.800, offset = 0.0

• Setting of inter-channel deviation control

CH specification = 1, SP = SP of specified CH + inter-channel

deviation control deviation

Inter-channel deviation control deviation = 0

• Other PID parameters are set to an appropriate value.

The following operation block diagram is used. The shaded area in

the figure indicates parameters whose setting can be changed.


OL/OH1 Ratio 1PV1

SP1

PID1 MV1

MV2

Offset 2

OL/OH2PV2

SP2

PID2

Ratio 2 Offset 2 +

Inter-channel deviation control function of CH2

MV branch output of CH2

Chapter 10. COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS10 - 1 Outline of Communications

The DMC10 is provided with an RS-485 communications function as part of the standard specifications. This

enables communications with a personal computer, PLC or other host devices using a user-prepared program. The

communications protocol can be selected from the CPL communications, which is the Yamatake's standard, and

the MODBUS communications.

This chapter describes the communications common functions and the CPL communications. For the explanation

specific to the MODBUS communications, see "Chapter 11. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS".

FeaturesThe features of the DMC10’s communications functions are as follows:

• Up to 15 DMC10s can be connected to a single master station as a host device.

When 16 or more units are to be used, the communications converter CMC10B(sold separately) is required.

• When the communications specifications of the host device conform to the RS-

232C interface, RS-232C/RS-485 conversion can be performed by the

communications converter CMC10L (sold separately).

• Almost all of the parameters held by the device can be communicated.

For details on communications parameters, see “10-8 List of AllCommunications Parameters” (page 10-16).

• Two types of address arrangements are available for frequently used parameters.

Parameter groups that can be handled by single commands can be selected

according to the application.

• Random access commands are available. Parameters at addresses separated by a

single command can be read or written.

• A maximum transmission speed of 19200bps is supported.

DefaultsThe following setups are required for starting communications:

Setting item

CPL/MODBUSswitching

Device address

Transmissionspeed

Data format

Min. responsetime

Setting Location

Set on PC Loader.

Set on rotary switch fordevice address.Set on PC Loader.

Set on PC Loader.

Set on PC Loader.

Setting Range

0: CPL1: MODBUS (ASCII format)2: MODBUS (RTU format)0 to F

0: 2400bps1: 4800bps2: 9600bps3: 19200bps0: 8bits, even parity,

1 stop bit1: 8bits, no parity,

2 stop bits0: 1ms1: 10ms2: 100ms3: 200ms

Factory setting

0: CPL

-

3: 19200bps

0: 8bits, even parity, 1 stop bit

1: 10ms

10-1

10-2

Chapter 10. COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS

Communications ProceduresThe communications procedure is as follows:

(1) The instruction message is sent from the host device (master station) to the

DMC10 unit (slave station) to communicate with.

(2) The slave station receives the instruction message, and performs read or write

processing according to the content of the message.

(3) The slave station sends a message corresponding to the processing content as

the response message.

(4) The master station receives the response message.

Handling Precautions• CPL and MODBUS can be switched only on the PC loader.

• Even when the MODBUS operating mode has been selected, the CPLcommunications are used on the loader port side.

• On the host side communications port, it is not possible to use the CPLwith the MODBUS ASCII format or the MODBUS RTU format.

10 - 2 Message Structure

10-3


02H 58H 0DH03H

STX X ETX

0AH

CR LF

(2)(1) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

Data link layer Application layer Data link layer

1 frame

(1) STX (start of message)(2) Station address(3) Sub address(4) Device ID code(5) Send message = command, Response message = response

(6) ETX (end of command/response)(7) Checksum(8) CR (delimiter)(9) LF (delimiter)

Message StructureThe following shows the message structure:Messages are broadly classified into two layers: the data link layer and theapplication layer.

• Data Link LayerThis layer contains the basic information required for communications suchas the destination of the communications message and the check informationof the message.

• Application layerData is read and written in this layer. The content of the layer variesaccording to the purpose of the message.

Messages comprise parts (1) to (9) in the figure below.The command (details sent from the ma ster station) and the response (detailsreturned from the slave station) are stored in the application layer.

Data Link Layer

OutlineThe data link layer is of a fixed length. The position of each data item and thenumber of its characters are already decided. Note, however, that the datapositions of the data link layer from ETX onwards shift according to the numberof characters in the application layer. The character length, however, remainsunchanged.

Response start conditions• The device sends the response message only when (1) message structure, (2)

device address, (3) sub address, (4) checksum and (5) message length of a singleframe in the data link layer are all correct. If even one of these is incorrect, noresponse messages are sent, and the device stands by for reception of STX.

Handling PrecautionsThe sub address must be set to 00 (30H, 30H) on the master station.

• Number of Word Addresses Accessible by a Single Frame

TypeRSWSRDWDRUWU

Description of CommandDecimal format read commandDecimal format write commandHexadecimal format read commandHexadecimal format write commandHexadecimal format random read commandHexadecimal format random write command

RAM Area161628272814

EEPROM Area161628162814

10-4


List of data link layer data definitionsThe following list shows the definitions for data in the data link layer:

Description of data items• STX (02H)

When STX is received, the device judges this to be the start of the sendmessage. For this reason, the device returns to the initial state whateverreception state it was in, and processing is started on the assumption that theSTX of the first character has been received. The purpose of this is to enablerecovery of the device’s response at the next correct message (e.g. RETRYmessage) from the master station in the event that noise, for example, causes anerror in the sent message.

• Station addressOf the messages sent by the master station, the device creates responsemessages only when device addresses are the same. Device addresses inmessages are expressed as 2-digit hexadecimal characters.The device address is set by the rotary switch for the device address within therange 0 to F. When 16 or more units are to be used, the communicationsconverter CMC10B (sold separately) is required.When the device address is set to 0 (30H, 30H), the device creates no responseeven if device addresses match.The device returns the same device address as that received as the responsemessage.

• Sub addressThe DMC10 does not use the sub address. For this reason, set “00” (30H, 30H).The device returns the same sub address as that received as the responsemessage.

• Device ID codeThe device sets X(58H) or x(78H) as the device judgment code. This code isdetermined for each device series, and other codes cannot be selected. Thedevice returns the same device judgment code as that received as the responsemessage. X(58H) is used as the default, and x(78H) is used for judging themessage as the resend message.

• ETXETX indicates the end of the application layer.

Data Name

STXStation address

Sub address

Device ID code

ETX

Checksum

CRLF

Character Code

02H0 to 0FH are expressedas Hex character codes.0 to 07FH are expressedas Hex character codes.“X” (58H) or “x” (78H)

ETX (03H)

00H to FFH areexpressed as 2-digit Hexcharacter codes.

0DH0AH

Number ofCharacters

12

2

1

1

2

11

Meaning of Data

Start of messageJudgement of device tocommunicate withNo function

Device type

End position ofapplication layerChecksum of message

End of message (1)End of message (2)

10-5


• Checksum

This value is for checking whether or not some abnormality (e.g. noise) causes

the message content to change during communications.

The checksum is expressed as two hexadecimal characters.

- How to create the checksum

1. Add the content of the message from STX through ETX in single byte

units.

2. Take 2’s complement of the addition results.

3. Convert the result to character codes.

• CR/LF

This indicates the end of the message. Immediately after LF is received, the

device immediately stands by for permission to process the received message.

Application LayerThe table below shows the configuration of the application layer.

ItemCommand

Data delimiter

Word address

Number of readsNumerical value tobe written

Description“RS” (read decimal number format continuous address datacommand)“WS” (write decimal number format continuous address datacommand)“RD” (read hexadecimal number format continuous addressdata command)“WS” (write hexadecimal number format continuous addressdata command)“RU” (read hexadecimal number format random address datacommand)“WU” (write hexadecimal number format random address datacommand)RS, WS: “,” (comma)Other commands: NoneRS, WS: “501W” etc.Other commands: “01F5” etc.Numerical value of characters expressed as “1” for exampleRS, WS: Numerical value of characters expressed

as “100” for exampleOther commands: Numeric value of characters expressed in

hexadecimal as “0064” for example

10-6


(2)(1) (3) (4)

Application layer

(1) Read continuos command(2) Data delimiter(3) Word address(4) Number of read data items

R 0S , 1 5 1 W , 1(2)

Read Continuous Data Command (RS command)This command reads data of continuous addresses. Designated addresses can be

applied to actual addresses and virtual addresses.

Send messageThis instruction enables the content of continuos data addresses starting with the

specified read start address to be read as a single message. The figure below shows

the structure of the application layer of the send message when the data is read.

Response messageA response message corresponding to the command content is returned when the

message is correctly received.

The figure below shows the structure of the application layer of the response

message when the data is read.

Maximum number of read data items per message• At normal termination (reading of single data item)

10 - 3 Description of Commands

0 0

(2)(1) (3)

,

0 0

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

, , ,

(2) (2)

X X

(1) Status code(2) Data delimiter(3) Data(4) Data 2 to (n—1)(5) Data (n)

(1)

The abnormal termination code is entered at XX. For details on content of code, see 10-6 List of Status Codes (page 10-14).

• At normal termination (reading of multiple data items)

• At abnormal termination

Up to 16 words for both RAM and EEPROM area

10-7


Write Continuous Data Command (WS command)This command writes data to continuous addresses.

Send messageThe figure below shows the structure of the application layer of the send message

for the data write instruction.

(2)(1) (3) (4)

(1) Write command(2) Data delimiter(3) Start write word address(4) Write data (1st word)(5) Write data (2nd word)

W 0S , 1 5 1 W , 1(2)

, 6 5(2) (5)

0 0

(1)

X X

(1)

(1) Status code


Response messageThe figure below shows the structure of the application layer of the response

message for the data write instruction.

• At normal completion

• At abnormal completion or warning

Maximum number of write data items per messageUp to 16 words for both RAM and EEPROM area

10-8


Read Continuous Fixed Length Data Command (RD command)This command reads continuos data in 2-byte units. This command is suited to

handling of data in ladder programs sent by PLC communications as the data is of

a fixed length.

The start data address is expressed as four hexadecimal digits. The number of data

items is expressed as four digits, and data is expressed as four x n (n is a plus

integer) hexadecimal digits.

Send messageThe read start data address (four hexadecimal digits) and the number of read data

items (four hexadecimal digits) are sent.

(1) Read continuous fixed length command(2) Start data word address(3) Number of data items

R

(1)

D

(2) (3)

Response messageIf the message is sent successfully, the termination code is taken to be normal (two

decimal digits), and the termination code is returned appended with the number of

read data (four hexadecimal digits x number of read data items) specified by the

command. If message transmission ends in error, the termination code is taken to

be in error (two decimal digits) and returned without the read data appended.

• At normal termination (reading of single data item)

• At normal completion (reading of multiple data items)


Maximum number of read data items per messageUp to 28 words for both RAM and EEPROM area

0

(1)

0

(2)

0

(1)

0

(2) (3) (4)

X

(1)

X

(1) Status code(2) Data(3) Data 2 to (n—1)(4) Data (n)


10-9


Write Continuous Fixed Length Data Command (WD command)This command writes continuos data in 2-byte units. This command is suited to

handling of data in ladder programs sent by PLC communications as the data is of

a fixed length.

The start data address is expressed as four hexadecimal digits. Data is expressed as

four x n (n is a plus integer) hexadecimal digits.

Send messageThe write start data address (four hexadecimal digits) and the number of write data

items (four hexadecimal digits x n) are sent.

• Writing of single data item

W D

(1) (2) (3)

W D

(1) Write continuous fixed length data command(2) Start data word address(3) Data 1(4) Data 2 to Data (n–1)(5) Data n

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

0

(1)

0

X

(1)

X

(1) Status code


• Writing of multiple data items

Response messageIf writing is successful, the normal termination code (two decimal digits) is

returned. If only part of the data is written, and the remaining data is not written,

the warning terminal code (two decimal digits) is returned. If none of the data is

written, the abnormal termination code (two decimal digits) is returned.



Maximum number of write data items per messageRAM area: Up to 27 words

EEPROM area: Up to 16 words

10-10


Read Fixed Length Random Data Command (RU command)This command reads random (non-continuous) data in 2-byte units.

Send messageThe data address (four hexadecimal digits) of the data to be read is sent in the

specified order.

0 0R

(1)

U

(3) (4) (5)(2)

(1) Read fixed length random data command(2) Sub-command: fixed to 00.(3) Data address 1(4) Data address 2(5) Data address (n)

Response messageIf the message is sent successfully, the termination code is taken to be normal (two

decimal digits), and the termination code is returned appended with the number of

read data (four hexadecimal digits x number of read data items) specified by the

command. If message transmission ends in error, the termination code is taken to

be in error (two decimal digits) and returned without the read data appended.



0

(1)

0

(2) (3) (4)

X

(1)

X

(1) Status code(2) Data 1(3) Data 2 to (n—1)(4) Data (n)

The abnormal termination code is entered at XX. For details on content of code, see 10-6 List of Status Codes (page 10-14)

Maximum number of read data items per messageUp to 28 words for both RAM and EEPROM area

10-11


Write Fixed Length Random Data Command (WU command)This command writes data to random (non-continuous) addresses in 2-byte units.

Data is expressed as four hexadecimal digits.

The maximum number of data items that can be written by a single command is

eight words.

Send messageData is sent for the specified number of write data items with the data address

(four hexadecimal digits) of the data to be written and the data (four hexadecimal

digits) as a pair.

0 0W

(1)

U

(3) (5) (6)(2) (4)

(1) Write fixed length random data command(2) Sub-command: fixed to 00.(3) Data address 1(4) Write data 1(5) Data address (n)(6) Write data (n)

0

(1)

0

X

(1)

X

(1) Status code


Response messageIf writing is successful, the normal termination code (two decimal digits) is

returned. If only part of the data is written, and the remaining data is not written,

the warning terminal code (two decimal digits) is returned. If none of the data is

written, the abnormal termination code (two decimal digits) is returned.



Maximum number of write data items per messageUp to 14 words for both RAM and EEPROM area

10-12


10 - 4 Definition of Word Addresses

RAM and EEPROM area of word addressesWord addresses are categorized as follows:

Handling PrecautionsThe number of times that EEPROM can be rewritten is limited (100,000operations). Accordingly, we recommend writing parameters that arerewritten extremely frequently to RAM that can be infinitely rewritten to.Note, however, that when writing to RAM is performed, the data inEEPROM is transferred to RAM when the power is turned ON again.

Write data rangeWriting is not performed and a specific code is returned if the write value exceeds

the range determined by parameters.

Write conditionsA fixed end code is returned also when the writing is not possible due to the

conditions.

Word address1000W to4999W

5000W to8999W

NameRAM accesswordaddress

EEPROMaccess wordaddress

RemarksReading and writing of these addresses are bothperformed on RAM. With writing, addresses arestored in RAM. So, the address becomes theEEPROM value when the power is turned OFFthen ON again.Note, however, that for some special data the datais stored to EEPROM where it remains.Reading and writing of these addresses are bothperformed on EEPROM.When EEPROM is read, the result is the same ashaving read 1001W to 4999W.With writing, addresses are stored to EEPROM.So, values are restored even if the power is turnedOFF then ON again.

10-13


10 - 5 How Numerical Values Are Expressed in the Application Layer

Each of the numerical values in the application layer must be expressed with zero suppressed.

The table below shows specifications, including those obtained when zero suppressed is not performed. Data in

send messages at the host must be sent with all zeros suppressed.

Handling of numerical values and signs

RS and WS commands

RD, WD, RU and WU commands

ItemNumerical valuefield, sign field

Specifications• In case of RS and WS

command, the + signmust not be appended.

• Append a “–” to expressminus numbers.

• Unwanted 0’s and spacesmust not be appended.

RemedyDiscontinue messageprocessing, and return endcode “99” by the receivemessage.

ItemUnwanted spaceUnwanted zeroNumerical value =zeroOther unwantedcharacters

Range of usablenumerical values

SpecificationsCannot be appended.Cannot be appended.Cannot be omitted. Be sure to use “0”.Numerical values may beprefixed with a “–”expressing a minusnumber. This sign cannotbe appended to othercharacters. The “+” signmust not be appended toindicate plus numericalvalues.–32768 to +32767. Valuesout of this range are notallowed.

RemedyDiscontinue message

processing, and return theerroneous end code by the

receive message.

ItemUnwanted spaceUnwanted zeroNumerical value =zeroOther unwantedcharactersRange of usablenumerical values

SpecificationsCannot be appended.Cannot be appended.Cannot be omitted. Be sure to use “0000”.Cannot be appended.

0000H to FFFFH

RemedyDiscontinue messageprocessing, and return theerroneous end code by thereceive message.

10-14


10 - 6 List of Status Codes

The termination code is returned as the response message when an error occurs on the application layer.

Status Code0099

22

23

40

41

42

Description of ErrorNormal endUndefined command

Value of written data out of range

Writing is not possible dependingon the device setting valueconditions or device externalconditions.Number of read words in error

Word address out of rangeConversion errorRange –32768 to +32767exceededValue of data exceeds the out-of-range, data error and 1-wordrange.

Example

AA, 1001W, 1RX03E80001

WS, 2001W, 3000

-

RS, 1001W, ARD03E9000Z

RS, 100000W, 1WD0XXX0001

WS, 2001W, 100, XXXWS, 2001W, 100000WD03E900010XXX

ProcessingAll processes ended normally.The end code is returned, andmessage processing is notperformed.Processing is continued excepton the relevant word address.Processing is continued excepton the relevant word address.

The end code is returned, andmessage processing is notperformed.The end code is returned, andmessage processing is notperformed.

Processing is performed up tothe relevant word address,however, processing from thenon is not performed.

10-15


10 - 7 Reception and Transmission Timing

Timing Specifications for Instruction and Response MessageWhen a slave station is connected with the master station directly via the RS-485

or the CMC10L, the following precautions regarding the transmission timing of

instruction messages from the master station and response messages from the

slave station should be observed.

Response time-outThe maximum response time from the end of the instruction message transmission

by the master station until when the master station receives a response message

from the slave station is 2s [(1) in figure]. So, the response time-out should be set

to 2s.

Generally, when a response time-out occurs, the instruction message is resent.

Transmission start timeA wait time of 10ms or more is required before the master station starts to

transmit the next instruction message (to the same slave station or a different slave

station) after the end of receiving a response message [(2) in figure].

• RS-485 3-wire system

Instruction message

Transmission line

Instruction message

Response message

(1) End of master station transmission – Transmission start time of slave station = Max. 2000ms

(2) End of slave station transmission – Transmission start time of master station = Min. 10ms

Response message

(1) (2)

RS-485 Driver Control Timing SpecificationsWhen the transmission/reception on the RS-485 3-wire system is directly

controlled by the master station, care should be paid to the following timing.

(enable)

(enable)

(disable)

(disable)

Master stationDriver control

Slave stationDriver control

Transmission line

(response message)

(instruction message)

Effective data

Effective data

(1) End of master station transmission – Driver disable time = Max. 500µs

(2) End of slave station reception – Driver enable time = Min. 1ms

(3) End of slave station transmission – Driver disable time = Max. 10ms

(4) End of master station reception – Driver enable time = Min. 10ms

End of master station transmission End of slave station transmission

(1) (4)

(2) (3)

10 - 8 List of All Communications Parameters (in RAM address order)

10-16

Word Address DataReading/writing of RAM , ROM

: Possible: Ranges whose PV decimal point position cannot be changed cannot be written. (Example:

In the case of PV range No.1, “0” cannot be written to the PV decimal point position.)X: Not possible

Decimal point information: Data is handled according to the content of the data information. (Example: When the PV

decimal point position is set to “1” and the conventional PV value is 100.0°C at PV rangeNo.22, the PV value in communications is handled as 1000.)

∆: Data is handled as 10X the actual value. (Example: When the actual value is 50.0%, thisvalue is handled as 500 in communications.)

∆1: Data is handled as 1000 times the actual value. For example, When the actual value is1.000, it is handled as 1000 in communications.)

–: The decimal point information is not influenced.

AliasA word address that is linked to the source word address. Though the content is completely thesame, the data arrangement has been changed. For this reason, the word address can beselectively used according to the purpose.

Example: To read the PV values of all channels continuously, word addresses 1004W

onwards are handy. To read the data in individual channel units, word addresses


Target Item RAM address ROM address RAM ROM Decimal Point Data InformationChannel Decimal Hex Decimal Hex R W R W Information

– All alarms representative 1001 03E9H – – X X X – For details, see Table 10-1.– PV alarm details 1002 03EAH – – X X X – For details, see Table 10-2.– Control-related status 1003 03EBH – – X X X – For details, see Table 10-3.

CH1 PV value 1004 03ECH – – X X X Varies according to range type CH2 1005 03EDH – – X X X and decimal point information.CH3 1006 03EEH – – X X X

CH4 1007 03EFH – – X X X

CH1 SP value in use 1008 03F0H 5008 1390H

CH2 1009 03F1H 5009 1391H

CH3 1010 03F2H 5010 1392H

CH4 1011 03F3H 5011 1393H

CH1 SP set number in use 1012 03F4H 5012 1394H – 1 to 4 (4-channel model)CH2 1013 03F5H 5013 1395H – 1 to 8 (2-channel model)CH3 1014 03F6H 5014 1396H –CH4 1015 03F7H 5015 1397H –CH1 Control output value 1020 03FCH – – X X ∆ –100 to +1100 (10X value)CH2 (during regular control) 1021 03FDH – – X X ∆

CH3 1022 03FEH – – X X ∆

CH4 1023 03FFH – – X X ∆

CH1 Heat side control output value 1024 0400H – – X X X ∆ –100 to +1100 (10X value)CH2 (valid only for heat/cool control) 1025 0401H – – X X X ∆

CH1 Cooling side control output value 1026 0402H – – X X X ∆ –100 to +1100 (10X value)CH2 (valid only for heat/cool control) 1027 0403H – – X X X ∆

CH1 AUTO/MANUAL mode 1028 0404H 5028 13A4H – 0: AUTOCH2 1029 0405H 5029 13A5H – 1: MANUALCH3 1030 0406H 5030 13A6H –CH4 1031 0407H 5031 13A7H –CH1 RUN/READY mode 1032 0408H 5032 13A8H – 0: RUNCH2 1033 0409H 5033 13A9H – 1: READYCH3 1034 040AH 5034 13AAH –CH4 1035 040BH 5035 13ABH –CH1 LOCAL/REMOTE mode 1036 040CH 5036 13ACH – 0: LOCALCH2 1037 040DH 5037 13ADH – 1: REMOTE

10-17



CH1 Count value for motor 1038 040EH 5038 13AEH X X X –CH2 adjustment 1039 040FH 5039 13AFH X X X –CH1 Auto-tuning 1040 0410H 5040 13B0H – 0: StopCH2 1041 0411H 5041 13B1H – 1: StartCH3 1042 0412H 5042 13B2H –CH4 1043 0413H 5043 13B3H –

– Internal calculation result of 1044 0414H – – X X X – For details, see Table 10-4.event output/external switch input

– External switch input state 1045 0415H – – X X X – For details, see Table 10-5.– Event output/control output 1046 0416H – – X X X – For details, see Table 10-6.

stateCH1 CT value 1047 0417H – – X X X ∆ 0 to 500 (10X value)CH2 1048 0418H – – X X X ∆

EV1 ON delay timer remaining 1051 041BH 5051 13BBH X X X –time (hours)ON delay timer remaining 1052 041CH 5052 13BCH X X X –time (minutes)ON delay timer remaining 1053 041DH 5053 13BDH X X X –time (seconds)

EV2 ON delay timer remaining 1054 C41EH 5054 13BEH X X X –time (hours)ON delay timer remaining 1055 041FH 5055 13BFH X X X –time (minutes)ON delay timer remaining 1056 0420H 5056 13C0H X X X –time (seconds)

EV3 ON delay timer remaining 1057 0421H 5057 13C1H X X X –time (hours)ON delay timer remaining 1058 0422H 5058 13C2H X X X –time (minutes)ON delay timer remaining 1059 0423H 5059 13C3H X X X –time (seconds)



EV6 ON delay timer remaining 1066 042AH 5066 13CAH X X X –time (hours)ON delay timer remaining 1067 042BH 5067 13CBH X X X –time (minutes)ON delay timer remaining 1068 042CH 5068 13CCH X X X –time (seconds)

EV7 ON delay timer remaining 1069 C42DH 5069 13CDH X X X –time (hours)ON delay timer remaining 1070 042EH 5070 13CEH X X X –time (minutes)ON delay timer remaining 1071 042FH 5071 13CFH X X X –time (seconds)

EV8 ON delay timer remaining 1072 0430H 5072 13D0H X X X –time (hours)ON delay timer remaining 1073 0431H 5073 13D1H X X X –time (minutes)ON delay timer remaining 1074 0432H 5074 13D2H X X X –time (seconds)

CH1 Proportional band (P) 1075 0433H 5075 13D3H ∆ 1 to 9999 (10X value)Reset time (I) 1076 0434H 5076 13D4H – 0 to 3600Rate time (D) 1077 0435H 5077 13D5H – 0 to 1200Manual reset (RE) 1078 0436H 5078 13D6H – –10 to +110

CH2 Proportional band (P) 1079 0437H 5079 13D7H ∆ 1 to 9999 (10X value)Reset time (I) 1080 0438H 5080 13D8H – 0 to 3600Rate time (D) 1081 0439H 5081 13D9H – 0 to 1200Manual reset (RE) 1082 043AH 5082 13DAH – –10 to +110

10-18



CH3 Proportional band (P) 1083 043BH 5083 13DBH ∆ 1 to 9999 (10X value)Reset time (I) 1084 043CH 5084 13DCH – 0 to 3600Rate time (D) 1085 043DH 5085 13DDH – 0 to 1200Manual reset (RE) 1086 043EH 5086 13DEH – –10 to +110

CH4 Proportional band (P) 1087 043FH 5087 13DFH ∆ 1 to 9999 (10X value)Reset time (I) 1088 0440H 5088 13E0H – 0 to 3600Rate time (D) 1089 0441H 5089 13E1H – 0 to 1200Manual reset (RE) 1090 0442H 5090 13E2H – –10 to +110

CH1 PID operation results 1091 0443H 5091 13E3H X X ∆

CH2 (before ratio operation) 1092 0444H 5092 13E4H X X ∆

CH3 1093 0445H 5093 13E5H X X ∆

CH4 1094 0446H 5094 13E6H X X ∆

CH1 Manual operation when no 1095 0447H 5095 13E7H –position proportional FB is

CH2 equipped 1096 0448H 5096 13E8H –

CH1 Motor feedback value 1097 0449H 5097 13E9H X X ∆

CH2 1098 044AH 5098 13EAH X X ∆

– Communications DI input 1100 044CH 5100 13ECH – 0 to 4095(1 to 12)

COMM1 Communications DI input 1101 044DH 5101 13EDH – 0, 1COMM2 Communications DI input 1102 044EH 5102 13EEH –COMM3 Communications DI input 1103 044FH 5103 13EFH –COMM4 Communications DI input 1104 0450H 5104 13F0H –

– Latch release 1109 0455H – – X X – For details, see Table 10-7.COMM1 Communications DI input 1111 0457H 5111 13F7H – 0, 1COMM2 Communications DI input 1112 0458H 5112 13F8H – Reading/writing of addresses COMM3 Communications DI input 1113 0459H 5113 13F9H – 1101–1104 is done to the same COMM4 Communications DI input 1114 045AH 5114 13FAH – COMM1–4 locations as for COMM5 Communications DI input 1115 045BH 5115 13FBH – addresses 1111–1114 (1101 COMM6 Communications DI input 1116 045CH 5116 13FCH – and1111 to COMM1, 1102 and COMM7 Communications DI input 1117 045DH 5117 13FDH – 1112 to COMM2, etc.).COMM8 Communications DI input 1118 045EH 5118 13FEH –COMM9 Communications DI input 1119 045FH 5119 13FFH –COMM10 Communications DI input 1120 0460H 5120 1400H –COMM11 Communications DI input 1121 0461H 5121 1401H –COMM12 Communications DI input 1122 0462H 5122 1402H –

– All alarms representative 1501 05DDH – – X X X – RAM address: Alias of 1001W– PV alarm details 1502 05DEH – – X X X – RAM address: Alias of 1002W– Control-related status 1503 05DFH – – X X X – RAM address: Alias of 1003W

CH1 PV value 1504 05E0H – – X X X RAM address: Alias of 1004WSP value in use 1505 05E1H 5505 1581H RAM address: Alias of 1008WSP set number in use 1506 05E2H 5506 1582H – RAM address: Alias of 1012WManipulated variable 1507 05E3H – – X X ∆ RAM address: Alias of 1020W(during regular control)Manipulated variable of heat 1508 05E4H – – X X X ∆ RAM address: Alias of 1024Wside (valid only for heat/coolcontrol)Manipulated variable of cool 1509 05E5H – – X X X ∆ RAM address: Alias of 1026Wside (valid only for heat/coolcontrol)AUTO/MANUAL mode 1510 05E6H 5510 1586H – RAM address: Alias of 1028WRUN/READY mode 1511 05E7H 5511 1587H – RAM address: Alias of 1032WLOCAL/REMOTE mode 1512 05E8H 5512 1588H – RAM address: Alias of 1036WAuto-tuning stop/start state 1513 05E9H 5513 1589H – RAM address: Alias of 1040WCT value 1514 05EAH – – X X X ∆ RAM address: Alias of 1047WProportional band (P) 1515 05EBH 5515 158BH ∆ RAM address: Alias of 1075WReset time (I) 1516 05ECH 5516 158CH – RAM address: Alias of 1076WRate time (D) 1517 05EDH 5517 158DH – RAM address: Alias of 1077WManual reset (RE) 1518 05EEH 5518 158EH – RAM address: Alias of 1078W

CH2 PV value 1519 05EFH – – X X X RAM address: Alias of 1005WSP value in use 1520 05F0H 5520 1590H RAM address: Alias of 1009WSP set number in use 1521 05F1H 5521 1591H – RAM address: Alias of 1013WManipulated variable 1522 05F2H – – X X ∆ RAM address: Alias of 1021W(during regular control)Manipulated variable of heat 1523 05F3H – – X X X ∆ RAM address: Alias of 1025Wside (valid only for heat/coolcontrol)

10-19



CH2 Manipulated variable of cool 1524 05F4H – – X X X ∆ RAM address: Alias of 1027Wside (valid only for heat/coolcontrol)AUTO/MANUAL mode 1525 05F5H 5525 1595H – RAM address: Alias of 1029WRUN/READY mode 1526 05F6H 5526 1596H – RAM address: Alias of 1033WLOCAL/REMOTE mode 1527 05F7H 5527 1597H – RAM address: Alias of 1037WAuto-tuning stop/start state 1528 05F8H 5528 1598H – RAM address: Alias of 1041WCT value 1529 05F9H – – X X X ∆ RAM address: Alias of 1048WProportional band (P) 1530 05FAH 5530 159AH ∆ RAM address: Alias of 1079WReset time (I) 1531 05FBH 5531 159BH – RAM address: Alias of 1080WRate time (D) 1532 05FCH 5532 159CH – RAM address: Alias of 1081WManual reset (RE) 1533 05FDH 5533 159DH – RAM address: Alias of 1082W

CH3 PV value 1534 05FEH – – X X X RAM address: Alias of 1006WSP value in use 1535 05FFH 5535 159FH RAM address: Alias of 1010WSP set number in use 1536 0600H 5536 15A0H – RAM address: Alias of 1014WManipulated variable 1537 0601H – – X X ∆ RAM address: Alias of 1022W(during regular control)AUTO/MANUAL mode 1540 0604H 5540 15A4H – RAM address: Alias of 1030WRUN/READY mode 1541 0605H 5541 15A5H – RAM address: Alias of 1034WAuto-tuning stop/start state 1543 0607H 5543 15A7H – RAM address: Alias of 1042WProportional band (P) 1545 0609H 5545 15A9H ∆ RAM address: Alias of 1083WReset time (I) 1546 060AH 5546 15AAH – RAM address: Alias of 1084WRate time (D) 1547 060BH 5547 15ABH – RAM address: Alias of 1085WManual reset (RE) 1548 060CH 5548 15ACH – RAM address: Alias of 1086W

CH4 PV value 1549 060DH – – X X X RAM address: Alias of 1007WSP value in use 1550 060EH 5550 15AEH RAM address: Alias of 1011WSP set number in use 1551 060FH 5551 15AFH – RAM address: Alias of 1015WManipulated variable 1552 0610H 5552 15B0H X X ∆ RAM address: Alias of 1023W(during regular control)AUTO/MANUAL mode 1555 0613H 5555 15B3H – RAM address: Alias of 1031WRUN/READY mode 1556 0614H 5556 15B4H – RAM address: Alias of 1035WAuto-tuning stop/start state 1558 0616H 5558 15B6H – RAM address: Alias of 1043WProportional band (P) 1560 0618H 5560 15B8H ∆ RAM address: Alias of 1087WReset time (I) 1561 0619H 5561 15B9H – RAM address: Alias of 1088WRate time (D) 1562 061AH 5562 15BAH – RAM address: Alias of 1089WManual reset (RE) 1563 061BH 5563 15BBH – RAM address: Alias of 1090W

CH1 SP value (No.1 SP) 2001 07D1H 6001 1771H Varies according to range typeSP value (No.2 SP) 2002 07D2H 6002 1772H and decimal point information.SP value (No.3 SP) 2003 07D3H 6003 1773H

SP value (No.4 SP) 2004 07D4H 6004 1774H

SP value (No.5 SP) * 2005 07D5H 6005 1775H

SP value (No.6 SP) * 2006 07D6H 6006 1776H

SP value (No.7 SP) * 2007 07D7H 6007 1777H

SP value (No.8 SP) * 2008 07D8H 6008 1778H

CH2 SP value (No.1 SP) 2009 07D9H 6009 1779H Varies according to range typeSP value (No.2 SP) 2010 07DAH 6010 177AH and decimal point information.SP value (No.3 SP) 2011 07DBH 6011 177BH

SP value (No.4 SP) 2012 07DCH 6012 177CH

SP value (No.5 SP) * 2013 07DDH 6013 177DH

SP value (No.6 SP) * 2014 07DEH 6014 177EH

SP value (No.7 SP) * 2015 07DFH 6015 177FH

SP value (No.8 SP) * 2016 07E0H 6016 1780H

CH3 SP value (No.1 SP) 2017 07E1H 6017 1781H Varies according to range typeSP value (No.2 SP) 2018 07E2H 6018 1782H and decimal point information.SP value (No.3 SP) 2019 07E3H 6019 1783H

SP value (No.4 SP) 2020 07E4H 6020 1784H

CH4 SP value (No.1 SP) 2025 07E9H 6025 1789H Varies according to range typeSP value (No.2 SP) 2026 07EAH 6026 178AH and decimal point information.SP value (No.3 SP) 2027 07EBH 6027 178BH

SP value (No.4 SP) 2028 07ECH 6028 178CH

* Enabled only on 2-channel models

10-20



CH1 Proportional band (P) 2101 0835H 6101 17D5H ∆ 1 to 9999 (10X value)or Reset time (I) 2102 0836H 6102 17D6H – 0 to 3600

H/C * Rate time (D) 2103 0837H 6103 17D7H – 0 to 1200CH1 MV lower value (OL) 2104 0838H 6104 17D8H – –10 to +110heat MV upper value (OH) 2105 0839H 6105 17D9H –

Manual reset (RE) 2106 083AH 6106 17DAH –Disturbance response 2112 0840H 6112 17E0H – 0 to 30coefficientDifferential (DIFF) 2114 0842H 6114 17E2H Varies according to decimal

point informationCH2 Proportional band (P) 2115 0843H 6115 17E3H ∆ 1 to 9999 (10X value)or Reset time (I) 2116 0844H 6116 17E4H – 0 to 3600

H/C * Rate time (D) 2117 0845H 6117 17E5H – 0 to 1200CH2 MV lower value (OL) 2118 0846H 6118 17E6H – –10 to +110heat MV upper value (OH) 2119 0847H 6119 17E7H –

Manual reset (RE) 2120 0848H 6120 17E8H –Disturbance response 2126 084EH 6126 17EEH – 0 to 30coefficientDifferential (DIFF) 2128 0850H 6128 17F0H Varies according to decimal

point informationCH3 Proportional band (P) 2129 0851H 6129 17F1H ∆ 1 to 9999 (10X value)or Reset time (I) 2130 0852H 6130 17F2H – 0 to 3600

H/C * Rate time (D) 2131 0853H 6131 17F3H – 0 to 1200CH1 MV lower value (OL) 2132 0854H 6132 17F4H – –10 to +110cool MV upper value (OH) 2133 0855H 6133 17F5H –

Manual reset (RE) 2134 0856H 6134 17F6H –Disturbance response 2140 085CH 6140 17FCH – 0 to 30coefficientDifferential (DIFF) 2142 085EH 6142 17FEH Varies according to decimal

point informationCH4 Proportional band (P) 2143 085FH 6143 17FFH ∆ 1 to 9999 (10X value)or Reset time (I) 2144 0860H 6144 1800H – 0 to 3600

H/C * Rate time (D) 2145 0861H 6145 1801H – 0 to 1200CH2 MV lower value (OL) 2146 0862H 6146 1802H – –10 to +110cool MV upper value (OH) 2147 0863H 6147 1803H –

Manual reset (RE) 2148 0864H 6148 1804H –Disturbance response 2154 086AH 6154 180AH – 0 to 30coefficientDifferential (DIFF) 2156 086CH 6156 180CH Varies according to decimal

point informationEV1 Event 1 setting value (main) 2901 0B55H 6901 1AF5H – RAM address: Alias of 3004W

Event 1 setting value (sub) 2902 0B56H 6902 1AF6H – RAM address: Alias of 3005WEV2 Event 2 setting value (main) 2903 0B57H 6903 1AF7H – RAM address: Alias of 3021W

Event 2 setting value (sub) 2904 0B58H 6904 1AF8H – RAM address: Alias of 3022WEV3 Event 3 setting value (main) 2905 0B59H 6905 1AF9H – RAM address: Alias of 3038W

Event 3 setting value (sub) 2906 0B5AH 6906 1AFAH – RAM address: Alias of 3039WEV4 Event 4 setting value (main) 2907 0B5BH 6907 1AFBH – RAM address: Alias of 3055W

Event 4 setting value (sub) 2908 0B5CH 6908 1AFCH – RAM address: Alias of 3056WEV bus1 Event 5 setting value (main) 2909 0B5DH 6909 1AFDH – RAM address: Alias of 3072W

Event 5 setting value (sub) 2910 0B5EH 6910 1AFEH – RAM address: Alias of 3073WEV bus2 Event 6 setting value (main) 2911 0B5FH 6911 1AFFH – RAM address: Alias of 3089W

Event 6 setting value (sub) 2912 0B60H 6912 1B00H – RAM address: Alias of 3090WEV bus3 Event 7 setting value (main) 2913 0B61H 6913 1B01H – RAM address: Alias of 3106W

Event 7 setting value (sub) 2914 0B62H 6914 1B02H – RAM address: Alias of 3107WEV bus4 Event 8 setting value (main) 2915 0B63H 6915 1B03H – RAM address: Alias of 3123W

Event 8 setting value (sub) 2916 0B64H 6916 1B04H – RAM address: Alias of 3124W

* H/C: when setting heat/cool control

10-21



EV1 Type of action 3001 0BB9H 7001 1B59H – 0 to 28Target channel 3002 0BBAH 7002 1B5AH – 1 to 4Alarm OR operation 3003 0BBBH 7003 1B5BH – 0: OFF, 1: ONEvent setting value (main) 3004 0BBCH 7004 1B5CH – –2000 to +10000 (Varies Event setting value (sub) 3005 0BBDH 7005 1B5DH – according to type selection.)Hysteresis 3006 0BBEH 7006 1B5EH – 0 to 10000 (Varies according to

type selection.)Direct/reverse 3007 0BBFH 7007 1B5FH – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse actionStandby 3008 0BC0H 7008 1B60H – 0: None, 1: Standby

2: Reset at SP changeEvent action in READY mode 3010 0BC2H 7010 1B62H – 0: Continued,

1: Forcibly OFFON delay time (h) 3011 0BC3H 7011 1B63H – 0 to 99ON delay time (min) 3012 0BC4H 7012 1B64H – 0 to 59ON delay time (s) 3013 0BC5H 7013 1B65H –OFF delay time (h) 3014 0BC6H 7014 1B66H – 0 to 99OFF delay time (min) 3015 0BC7H 7015 1B67H – 0 to 59OFF delay time (s) 3016 0BC8H 7016 1B68H –

EV2 Type of action 3018 0BCAH 7018 1B6AH – 0 to 28Target channel 3019 0BCBH 7019 1B6BH – 1 to 4Alarm OR operation 3020 0BCCH 7020 1B6CH – 0: OFF, 1: ONEvent setting value (main) 3021 0BCDH 7021 1B6DH – –2000 to +10000 (Varies Event setting value (sub) 3022 0BCEH 7022 1B6EH – according to type selection.)Hysteresis 3023 0BCFH 7023 1B6FH – 0 to 10000 (Varies according to

type selection.)Direct/reverse 3024 0BD0H 7024 1B70H – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse actionStandby 3025 0BD1H 7025 1B71H – 0: None, 1: Standby

2: Reset at SP changeEvent action in READY mode 3027 0BD4H 7027 1B74H – 0: Continued,

1: Forcibly OFFON delay time (h) 3028 0BD5H 7028 1B75H – 0 to 99ON delay time (min) 3029 0BD6H 7029 1B76H – 0 to 59ON delay time (s) 3030 0BD7H 7030 1B77H –OFF delay time (h) 3031 0BD8H 7031 1B78H – 0 to 99OFF delay time (min) 3032 0BD9H 7032 1B79H – 0 to 59OFF delay time (s) 3033 0BDAH 7033 1B7AH –

EV3 Type of action 3035 0BDBH 7035 1B7BH – 0 to 28Target channel 3036 0BDCH 7036 1B7CH – 1 to 4Alarm OR operation 3037 0BDDH 7037 1B7DH – 0: OFF, 1: ONEvent setting value (main) 3038 0BDEH 7038 1B7EH – –2000 to +10000 (Varies Event setting value (sub) 3039 0BDFH 7039 1B7FH – according to type selection.)Hysteresis 3040 0BE0H 7040 1B80H – 0 to 10000 (Varies according to

type selection.)Direct/reverse 3041 0BE1H 7041 1B81H – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse actionStandby 3042 0BE2H 7042 1B82H – 0: None, 1: Standby

2: Reset at SP changeEvent action in READY mode 3044 0BE4H 7044 1B84H – 0: Continued,

1: Forcibly OFFON delay time (h) 3045 0BE5H 7045 1B85H – 0 to 99ON delay time (min) 3046 0BE6H 7046 1B86H – 0 to 59ON delay time (s) 3047 0BE7H 7047 1B87H –OFF delay time (h) 3048 0BE8H 7048 1B88H – 0 to 99OFF delay time (min) 3049 0BE9H 7049 1B89H – 0 to 59OFF delay time (s) 3050 0BEAH 7050 1B8AH –

EV4 Type of action 3052 0BECH 7052 1B8CH – 0 to 28Target channel 3053 0BEDH 7053 1B8DH – 1 to 4Alarm OR operation 3054 0BEEH 7054 1B8EH – 0: OFF, 1: ONEvent setting value (main) 3055 0BEFH 7055 1B8FH – –2000 to +10000 (Varies Event setting value (sub) 3056 0BF0H 7056 1B90H – according to type selection.)Hysteresis 3057 0BF1H 7057 1B91H – 0 to 10000 (Varies according to

type selection.)Direct/reverse 3058 0BF2H 7058 1B92H – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse actionStandby 3059 0BF3H 7059 1B93H – 0: None, 1: Standby

2: Reset at SP change

10-22



EV4 Event action in READY mode 3061 0BF5H 7061 1B95H – 0: Continued, 1: Forcibly OFF

ON delay time (h) 3062 0BF6H 7062 1B96H – 0 to 99ON delay time (min) 3063 0BF7H 7063 1B97H – 0 to 59ON delay time (s) 3064 0BF8H 7064 1B98H –OFF delay time (h) 3065 0BF9H 7065 1B99H – 0 to 99OFF delay time (min) 3066 0BFAH 7066 1B9AH – 0 to 59OFF delay time (s) 3067 0BFBH 7067 1B9BH –

EV bus 1 Type of action 3069 0BFDH 7069 1B9DH – 0 to 28Target channel 3070 0BFEH 7070 1B9EH – 1 to 4Alarm OR operation 3071 0BFFH 7071 1B9FH – 0: OFF, 1: ONEvent setting value (main) 3072 0C00H 7072 1BA0H – –2000 to +10000 (Varies Event setting value (sub) 3073 0C01H 7073 1BA1H – according to type selection.)Hysteresis 3074 0C02H 7074 1BA2H – 0 to 10000 (Varies according to

type selection.)Direct/reverse 3075 0C03H 7075 1BA3H – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse actionStandby 3076 0C04H 7076 1BA4H – 0: None, 1: Standby

2: Reset at SP changeEvent action in READY mode 3078 0C06H 7078 1BA6H – 0: Continued,

1: Forcibly OFFON delay time (h) 3079 0C07H 7079 1BA7H – 0 to 99ON delay time (min) 3080 0C08H 7080 1BA8H – 0 to 59ON delay time (s) 3081 0C09H 7081 1BA9H –OFF delay time (h) 3082 0C0AH 7082 1BAAH – 0 to 99OFF delay time (min) 3083 0C0BH 7083 1BABH – 0 to 59OFF delay time (s) 3084 0C0CH 7084 1BACH –

EV bus 2 Type of action 3086 0C0EH 7086 1BAEH – 0 to 28Target channel 3087 0C0FH 7087 1BAFH – 1 to 4Alarm OR operation 3088 0C00H 7088 1BA0H – 0: OFF, 1: ONEvent setting value (main) 3089 0C11H 7089 1BB1H – –2000 to +10000 (Varies Event setting value (sub) 3090 0C12H 7090 1BB2H – according to type selection.)Hysteresis 3091 0C13H 7091 1BB3H – 0 to 10000 (Varies according to

type selection.)Direct/reverse 3092 0C14H 7092 1BB4H – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse actionStandby 3093 0C15H 7093 1BB5H – 0: None, 1: Standby

2: Reset at SP changeEvent action in READY mode 3095 0C17H 7095 1BB7H – 0: Continued,

1: Forcibly OFFON delay time (h) 3096 0C18H 7096 1BB8H – 0 to 99ON delay time (min) 3097 0C19H 7097 1BB9H – 0 to 59ON delay time (s) 3098 0C1AH 7098 1BBAH –OFF delay time (h) 3099 0C1BH 7099 1BBBH – 0 to 99OFF delay time (min) 3100 0C1CH 7100 1BBCH – 0 to 59OFF delay time (s) 3101 0C1DH 7101 1BBDH –

EV bus 3 Type of action 3103 0C1FH 7103 1BBFH – 0 to 28Target channel 3104 0C20H 7104 1BC0H – 1 to 4Alarm OR operation 3105 0C21H 7105 1BC1H – 0: OFF, 1: ONEvent setting value (main) 3106 0C22H 7106 1BC2H – –2000 to +10000 (Varies Event setting value (sub) 3107 0C23H 7107 1BC3H – according to type selection.)Hysteresis 3108 0C24H 7108 1BC4H – 0 to 10000 (Varies according to

type selection.)Direct/reverse 3109 0C25H 7109 1BC5H – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse actionStandby 3110 0C26H 7110 1BC6H – 0: None, 1: Standby

2: Reset at SP changeEvent action in READY mode 3112 0C28H 7112 1BC8H – 0: Continued,

1: Forcibly OFFON delay time (h) 3113 0C29H 7113 1BC9H – 0 to 99ON delay time (min) 3114 0C2AH 7114 1BCAH – 0 to 59ON delay time (s) 3115 0C2BH 7115 1BCBH –OFF delay time (h) 3116 0C2CH 7116 1BCCH – 0 to 99OFF delay time (min) 3117 0C2DH 7117 1BCDH – 0 to 59OFF delay time (s) 3118 0C2EH 7118 1BCEH –

10-23


Target Item RAM address ROM address RAM ROM Decimal Point Data InformationChannel Decimal Hex Decimal Hex R W R W InformationEV bus 4 Type of action 3120 0C30H 7120 1BD0H – 0 to 28

Target channel 3121 0C31H 7121 1BD1H – 1 to 4Alarm OR operation 3122 0C32H 7122 1BD2H – 0: OFF, 1: ONEvent setting value (main) 3123 0C33H 7123 1BD3H – –2000 to +10000 (Varies Event setting value (sub) 3124 0C34H 7124 1BD4H – according to type selection.)Hysteresis 3125 0C35H 7125 1BD5H – 0 to 10000 (Varies according to

type selection.)Direct/reverse 3126 0C36H 7126 1BD6H – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse actionStandby 3127 0C37H 7127 1BD7H – 0: None, 1: Standby

2: Reset at SP changeEvent action in READY mode 3129 0C39H 7129 1BD9H – 0: Continued,

1: Forcibly OFFON delay time (h) 3130 0C3AH 7130 1BDAH – 0 to 99ON delay time (min) 3131 0C3BH 7131 1BDBH – 0 to 59ON delay time (s) 3132 0C3CH 7132 1BDCH –OFF delay time (h) 3133 0C3DH 7133 1BDDH – 0 to 99OFF delay time (min) 3134 0C3EH 7134 1BDEH – 0 to 59OFF delay time (s) 3135 0C3FH 7135 1BDFH –

CH1 Control method 3201 0C81H 7201 1C21H – 0: ON/OFFCH2 3202 0C82H 7202 1C22H – 1: Self-tuningCH3 3203 0C83H 7203 1C23H – 2: Fixed PIDCH4 3204 0C84H 7204 1C24H –CH1 Time proportional cycle 3207 0C87H 7207 1C27H – 5 to 120 (relay)CH2 3208 0C88H 7208 1C28H – 1 to 120 (voltage)CH3 3209 0C89H 7209 1C29H –CH4 3210 0C8AH 7210 1C2AH –CH1 PV bias 3211 0C8BH 7211 1C2BH Varies according to decimal CH2 3212 0C8CH 7212 1C2CH point informationCH3 3213 0C8DH 7213 1C2DH

CH4 3214 0C8EH 7214 1C2EH

CH1 PV filter 3215 0C8FH 7215 1C2FH ∆ 0 to 1200 (10X value)CH2 3216 0C90H 7216 1C30H ∆

CH3 3217 0C91H 7217 1C31H ∆

CH4 3218 0C92H 7218 1C32H ∆

– Use of output branch control 3903 0F3FH 7903 1EDFH – 0: OFF 1: ONCH1 MV branch output channel 3219 0C93H 7219 1C33H – 1 to 4CH2 3220 0C94H 7220 1C34H –CH3 3221 0C95H 7221 1C35H –CH4 3222 0C96H 7222 1C36H –CH1 Ratio for MV branch output 3223 0C97H 7223 1C37H ∆1 0 to 10000 (1000X value)CH2 3224 0C98H 7224 1C38H ∆1CH3 3225 0C99H 7225 1C39H ∆1CH4 3226 0C9AH 7226 1C3AH ∆1CH1 MV rate-of-change limit 3227 0C9BH 7227 1C3BH ∆ 0 to 1000 (10X value)CH2 3228 0C9CH 7228 1C3CH ∆

CH3 3229 0C9DH 7229 1C3DH ∆

CH4 3230 0C9EH 7230 1C3EH ∆

CT1 Designated channel for 3231 0C9FH 7231 1C3FH – 1 to 6CT2 CT input 3232 0CA0H 7232 1C40H –CH1 Current transformer input 3235 0CA3H 7235 1C43H – 3 to 30CH2 measurement standby time 3236 0CA4H 7236 1C44H –CH1 Time proportional operating 3239 0CA7H 7239 1C47H – 0: Priority on controllabilityCH2 mode 3240 0CA8H 7240 1C48H – 1: Priority on control device lifeCH3 3241 0CA9H 7241 1C49H –CH4 3242 0CAAH 7242 1C4AH –CH1 Self-tuning up/down startup 3243 0CABH 7243 1C4BH – 0: During PV up/downCH2 condition 3244 0CACH 7244 1C4CH – 1: During PV upCH3 3245 0CADH 7245 1C4DH –CH4 3246 0CAEH 7246 1C4EH –CH1 Self-tuning correction width 3247 0CAFH 7247 1C4FH ∆ Thermocouple/RTD 0 to 20CH2 3248 0CB0H 7248 1C50H ∆ DC voltage/current 0 to 50 CH3 3249 0CB1H 7249 1C51H ∆ (10X value)CH4 3250 0CB2H 7250 1C52H ∆

CH1 Inter-channel deviation control 3255 0CB7H 7255 1C57H – 0: OFFCH2 3256 0CB8H 7256 1C58H – 1: ONCH3 3257 0CB9H 7257 1C59H –CH4 3258 0CBAH 7258 1C5AH –

10-24



CH1 Designated channel for 3259 0CBBH 7259 1C5BH – 1 to 4CH2 inter-channel deviation 3260 0CBCH 7260 1C5CH –CH3 control 3261 0CBDH 7261 1C5DH –CH4 3262 0CBEH 7262 1C5EH –CH1 Inter-channel deviation 3263 0CBFH 7263 1C5FH – 0: PV + deviation valueCH2 control type 3264 0CC0H 7264 1C60H – 1: SP + deviation valueCH3 3265 0CC1H 7265 1C61H –CH4 3266 0CC2H 7266 1C62H –CH1 Inter-channel deviation 3267 0CC3H 7267 1C63H –2000 to +10000 CH2 control deviation value 3268 0CC4H 7268 1C64H (Varies according to decimal CH3 3269 0CC5H 7269 1C65H point information)CH4 3270 0CC6H 7270 1C66H

CH1 MV branch output offset 3271 0CC7H 7271 1C67H ∆ –2000 to +10000 (10X value)CH2 3272 0CC8H 7272 1C68H ∆

CH3 3273 0CC9H 7273 1C69H ∆

CH4 3274 0CCAH 7274 1C6AH ∆

– Position proportional control 3275 0CCBH 7275 1C6BH – For details, see page 9-6.type

CH1 Dead zone 3276 0CCCH 7276 1C6CH – 1 to 250 (10X value)CH2 3277 0CCDH 7277 1C6DH –CH1 Motor adjustment 3278 0CCEH 7278 1C6EH – 0: StopCH2 3279 0CCFH 7279 1C6FH – 1: StartupCH1 Adjustment value on the 3280 0CD0H 7280 1C70H – 0 to 9999CH2 fully closed side 3281 0CD1H 7281 1C71H –CH1 Adjustment value on the 3282 0CD2H 7282 1C72H – 0 to 9999CH2 full open side 3283 0CD3H 7283 1C73H –CH1 Motor open time 3284 0CD4H 7284 1C74H – 0 to 250CH2 3285 0CD5H 7285 1C75H –CH1 Motor resistance selection 3286 0CD6H 7286 1C76H – For details, see page 9-6.CH2 3287 0CD7H 7287 1C77H –CH1 Potentiometer long service 3288 0CD8H 7288 1C78H – For details, see page 9-6.CH2 life 3289 0CD9H 7289 1C79H –CH1 External bus type definitions 3292 0CDCH 7292 1C7CH – 0 to 1 Fordetails, see page 8-30.

– Energy saving 3293 0CDDH 7293 1C7DH – For details, see page 9-12.– Energy saving delay 3294 0CDEH 7294 1C7EH –

CH1 Control method 3301 0CE5H 7301 1C85H – RAM address: Alias of 3201WTime proportional cycle 3302 0CE6H 7302 1C86H – RAM address: Alias of 3207WPV bias 3303 0CE7H 7303 1C87H RAM address: Alias of 3211WPV filter 3304 0CE8H 7304 1C88H ∆ RAM address: Alias of 3215WSelf-tuning up/down startup 3305 0CE9H 7305 1C89H – RAM address: Alias of 3243WconditionSelf-tuning correction width 3306 0CEAH 7306 1C8AH ∆ RAM address: Alias of 3247WMV branch output channel 3307 0CEBH 7307 1C8BH – RAM address: Alias of 3903WRatio for MV branch output 3308 0CECH 7308 1C8CH ∆1 RAM address: Alias of 3223WMV rate-of-change limit 3309 0CEDH 7309 1C8DH ∆ RAM address: Alias of 3227WCT measurement standby time 3311 0CEFH 7311 1C8FH – RAM address: Alias of 3235WTime proportional operating 3312 0CF0H 7312 1C90H – RAM address: Alias of 3239Wmode

CH2 Control method 3313 0CF1H 7313 1C91H – RAM address: Alias of 3202WTime proportional cycle 3314 0CF2H 7314 1C92H – RAM address: Alias of 3208WPV bias 3315 0CF3H 7315 1C93H RAM address: Alias of 3212WPV filter 3316 0CF4H 7316 1C94H ∆ RAM address: Alias of 3216WSelf-tuning up/down startup 3317 0CF5H 7317 1C95H – RAM address: Alias of 3244WconditionSelf-tuning correction width 3318 0CF6H 7318 1C96H ∆ RAM address: Alias of 3248WMV branch output channel 3319 0CF7H 7319 1C97H – RAM address: Alias of 3904WRatio for MV branch output 3320 0CF8H 7320 1C98H ∆1 RAM address: Alias of 3224WMV rate-of-change limit 3321 0CF9H 7321 1C99H ∆ RAM address: Alias of 3228WCT measurement standby time 3323 0CFBH 7323 1C9BH – RAM address: Alias of 3236WTime proportional operating 3324 0CFCH 7324 1C9CH – RAM address: Alias of 3240Wmode

CH3 Control method 3325 0CFDH 7325 1C9DH – RAM address: Alias of 3203WTime proportional cycle 3326 0CFEH 7326 1C9EH – RAM address: Alias of 3209WPV bias 3327 0CFFH 7327 1C9FH RAM address: Alias of 3213WPV filter 3328 0D00H 7328 1CA0H ∆ RAM address: Alias of 3217WSelf-tuning up/down startup 3329 0D01H 7329 1CA1H – RAM address: Alias of 3245Wcondition

10-25



CH3 Self-tuning correction width 3330 0D02H 7330 1CA2H ∆ RAM address: Alias of 3249WMV branch output channel 3331 0D03H 7331 1CA3H – RAM address: Alias of 3905WRatio for MV branch output 3332 0D04H 7332 1CA4H ∆1 RAM address: Alias of 3225WMV rate-of-change limit 3333 0D05H 7333 1CA5H ∆ RAM address: Alias of 3229WTime proportional operating 3336 0D08H 7336 1CA8H – RAM address: Alias of 3241Wmode

CH4 Control method 3337 0D09H 7337 1CA9H – RAM address: Alias of 3204WTime proportional cycle 3338 0D0AH 7338 1CAAH – RAM address: Alias of 3210WPV bias 3339 0D0BH 7339 1CABH RAM address: Alias of 3214WPV filter 3340 0D0CH 7340 1CACH ∆ RAM address: Alias of 3218WSelf-tuning up/down startup 3341 0D0DH 7341 1CADH – RAM address: Alias of 3246WconditionSelf-tuning correction width 3342 0D0EH 7342 1CAEH ∆ RAM address: Alias of 3250WMV branch output channel 3343 0D0FH 7343 1CAFH – RAM address: Alias of 3906WRatio for MV branch output 3344 0D10H 7344 1CB0H ∆1 RAM address: Alias of 3226WMV rate-of-change limit 3345 0D11H 7345 1CB1H ∆ RAM address: Alias of 3230WTime proportional operating 3348 0D14H 7348 1CB4H – RAM address: Alias of 3242Wmode

– Memory protection 3401 0D49H 7401 1CE9H – 0 to 3– Single/multi-SP set 3402 0D4AH 7402 1CEAH – 0: Single SP 1: Multi-SP

CH1 Temperature unit 3403 0D4BH 7403 1CEBH – 0: °C, 1: Special unitControl action 3404 0D4CH 7404 1CECH – 0: Heat control 1: Cooling controlInput type 3405 0D4DH 7405 1CEDH – 0 to 13, 21 to 28, 41 to 44Decimal point position 3406 0D4EH 7406 1CEEH – 0, 1 (Varies according to range type.)PV range lower limit 3407 0D4FH 7407 1CEFH Varies according to range type PV range upper limit 3408 0D50H 7408 1CF0H and decimal point information.Lower SP limit 3409 0D51H 7409 1CF1H

Upper SP limit 3410 0D52H 7410 1CF2H

MV at PV alarm occurrence 3411 0D53H 7411 1CF3H ∆ –100 to +1100 (10X value)MV in READY mode 3412 0D54H 7412 1CF4H ∆

PID initial MV 3413 0D55H 7413 1CF5H ∆

Cold junction compensation 3414 0D56H 7414 1CF6H – 0: ON 1: OFFactionAUTO/MANUAL switching 3415 0D57H 7415 1CF7H – 0: Bumpless 1: PresetactionPreset manual value 3416 0D58H 7416 1CF8H ∆ –100 to +1100 (10X value)SP down gradient 3417 0D59H 7417 1CF9H Varies according to decimalSP up gradient 3418 0D5AH 7418 1CFAH point informationSP gradient time unit 3419 0D5BH 7419 1CFBH 0: unit/min 1: unit/h

CH2 Temperature unit 3421 0D5DH 7421 1CFDH – 0: °C, 1: Special unitControl action 3422 0D5EH 7422 1CFEH – 0: Heat control 1: Cooling controlInput type 3423 0D5FH 7423 1CFFH – 0 to 13, 21 to 28, 41 to 44Decimal point position 3424 0D60H 7424 1D00H – 0, 1 (Varies according to range type.)PV range lower limit 3425 0D61H 7425 1D01H Varies according to range type PV range upper limit 3426 0D62H 7426 1D02H and decimal point information.Lower SP limit 3427 0D63H 7427 1D03H

Upper SP limit 3428 0D64H 7428 1D04H

MV at PV alarm occurrence 3429 0D65H 7429 1D05H ∆ –100 to +1100 (10X value)MV in READY mode 3430 0D66H 7430 1D06H ∆

PID initial MV 3431 0D67H 7431 1D07H ∆

Cold junction compensation 3432 0D68H 7432 1D08H – 0: ON 1: OFFactionAUTO/MANUAL switching 3433 0D69H 7433 1D09H – 0: Bumpless 1: PresetactionPreset manual value 3434 0D6AH 7434 1D0AH ∆ –100 to +1100 (10X value)SP down gradient 3435 0D6BH 7435 1D0BH Varies according to decimalSP up gradient 3436 0D6CH 7436 1D0CH point informationSP gradient time unit 3437 0D6DH 7437 1D0DH 0: unit/min 1: unit/h

CH3 Temperature unit 3439 0D6FH 7439 1D0FH – 0: °C, 1: Special unitControl action 3440 0D70H 7440 1D10H – 0: Heat control 1: Cooling controlInput type 3441 0D71H 7441 1D11H – 0 to 13, 21 to 28, 41 to 44Decimal point position 3442 0D72H 7442 1D12H – 0, 1 (Varies according to range type.)PV range lower limit 3443 0D73H 7443 1D13H Varies according to range type PV range upper limit 3444 0D74H 7444 1D14H and decimal point information.Lower SP limit 3445 0D75H 7445 1D15H


10-26



CH3 MV at PV alarm occurrence 3447 0D77H 7447 1D17H ∆ –100 to +1100 (10X value)MV in READY mode 3448 0D78H 7448 1D18H ∆

PID initial MV 3449 0D79H 7449 1D19H ∆

Cold junction compensation 3450 0D7AH 7450 1D1AH – 0: ON 1: OFFactionAUTO/MANUAL switching 3451 0D7BH 7451 1D1BH – 0: Bumpless 1: PresetactionPreset manual value 3452 0D7CH 7452 1D1CH ∆ –100 to +1100 (10X value)SP down gradient 3453 0D7DH 7453 1D1DH Varies according to decimalSP up gradient 3454 0D7EH 7454 1D1EH point informationSP gradient time unit 3455 0D7FH 7455 1D1FH 0: unit/min 1: unit/h

CH4 Temperature unit 3457 0D81H 7457 1D21H – 0: °C, 1: Special unitControl action 3458 0D82H 7458 1D22H – 0: Heat control 1: Cooling controlInput type 3459 0D83H 7459 1D23H – 0 to 13, 21 to 28, 41 to 44Decimal point position 3460 0D84H 7460 1D24H – 0, 1 (Varies according to range type.)PV range lower limit 3461 0D85H 7461 1D25H Varies according to range type PV range upper limit 3462 0D86H 7462 1D26H and decimal point information.Lower SP limit 3463 0D87H 7463 1D27H


MV at PV alarm occurrence 3465 0D89H 7465 1D29H ∆ –100 to +1100 (10X value)MV in READY mode 3466 0D8AH 7466 1D2AH ∆

PID initial MV 3467 0D8BH 7467 1D2BH ∆

Cold junction compensation 3468 0D8CH 7468 1D2CH – 0: ON 1: OFFactionAUTO/MANUAL switching 3469 0D8DH 7469 1D2DH – 0: Bumpless 1: PresetactionPreset manual value 3470 0D8EH 7470 1D2EH ∆ –100 to +1100 (10X value)SP down gradient 3471 0D8FH 7471 1D2FH Varies according to decimalSP up gradient 3472 0D90H 7472 1D30H point informationSP gradient time unit 3473 0D91H 7473 1D31H 0: unit/min 1: unit/h

– LED operation type 3501 0DADH 7501 1D4DH – 0 to 18– Channel targeted for LED 3502 0DAEH 7502 1D4EH – 0 to 4

operationAUX1 Type of action 3503 0DAFH 7503 1D4FH – 0 to 5

Target channel 3504 0DB0H 7504 1D50H – 1 to 40% setting 3505 0DB1H 7505 1D51H – –2000 to +10000 (Varies 100% setting 3506 0DB2H 7506 1D52H – according to type selection.)Output type 3507 0DB3H 7507 1D53H – 0: 4 to 20mA 1: 0 to 20mA

AUX2 Type of action 3508 0DB4H 7508 1D54H – 0 to 5Target channel 3509 0DB5H 7509 1D55H – 1 to 40% setting 3510 0DB6H 7510 1D56H – –2000 to +10000 (Varies 100% setting 3511 0DB7H 7511 1D57H – according to type selection.)Output type 3512 0DB8H 7512 1D58H – 0: 4 to 20mA 1: 0 to 20mA

– Operation of heat/cool control 3513 0DB9H 7513 1D59H – 0: OFF 1: ONCH1 Heat/cool control dead zone 3514 0DBAH 7514 1D5AH ∆ –1000 to +1000 (10X value)CH2 3517 0DBDH 7517 1D5DH ∆

– Remote SP input 3519 0DBFH 7519 1D5FH – 0: OFF 1: ONRSW1 Type of action 3601 0E11H 7601 1DB1H – 0 to 14

Target channel 3602 0E12H 7602 1DB2H – 0 to 8 (Varies according to typeselection.)

Input assignment 2 3603 0E13H 7603 1DB3H – For details, see Table 10-12.Input assignment 1 3604 0E14H 7604 1DB4H – For details, see Table 10-11.Logic 3605 0E15H 7605 1DB5H – 0: OR 1: ANDDirect/reverse 3606 0E16H 7606 1DB6H – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse actionRSW2 Type of action 3607 0E17H 7607 1DB7H – 0 to 14

Target channel 3608 0E18H 7608 1DB8H – 0 to 2Input assignment 2 3609 0E19H 7609 1DB9H – For details, see Table 10-12.Input assignment 1 3610 0E1AH 7610 1DBAH – For details, see Table 10-11.Logic 3611 0E1BH 7611 1DBBH – 0: OR 1: ANDDirect/reverse 3612 0E1CH 7612 1DBCH – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse action

10-27


Target Item RAM address ROM address RAM ROM Decimal Point Data InformationChannel Decimal Hex Decimal Hex R W R W InformationRSW3 Type of action 3613 0E1DH 7613 1DBDH – 0 to 14

Target channel 3614 0E1EH 7614 1DBEH – 0 to 2Input assignment 2 3615 0E1FH 7615 1DBFH – For details, see Table 10-12.Input assignment 1 3616 0E20H 7616 1DC0H – For details, see Table 10-11.Logic 3617 0E21H 7617 1DC1H – 0: OR 1: ANDDirect/reverse 3618 0E22H 7618 1DC2H – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse actionRSW4 Type of action 3619 0E23H 7619 1DC3H – 0 to 14

Target channel 3620 0E24H 7620 1DC4H – 0 to 2Input assignment 2 3621 0E25H 7621 1DC5H – For details, see Table 10-12.Input assignment 1 3622 0E26H 7622 1DC6H – For details, see Table 10-11.Logic 3623 0E27H 7623 1DC7H – 0: OR 1: ANDDirect/reverse 3624 0E28H 7624 1DC8H – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse actionRSW Type of action 3625 0E29H 7625 1DC9H – 0 to 14bus 1 Target channel 3626 0E2AH 7626 1DCAH – 0 to 2

Input assignment 2 3627 0E2BH 7627 1DCBH – For details, see Table 10-12.Input assignment 1 3628 0E2CH 7628 1DCCH – For details, see Table 10-11.Logic 3629 0E2DH 7629 1DCDH – 0: OR 1: ANDDirect/reverse 3630 0E2EH 7630 1DCEH – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse actionRSW Type of action 3631 0E2FH 7631 1DCFH – 0 to 14bus 2 Target channel 3632 0E30H 7632 1DD0H – 0 to 2

Input assignment 2 3633 0E31H 7633 1DD1H – For details, see Table 10-12.Input assignment 1 3634 0E32H 7634 1DD2H – For details, see Table 10-11.Logic 3635 0E33H 7635 1DD3H – 0: OR 1: ANDDirect/reverse 3636 0E34H 7636 1DD4H – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse actionRSW Type of action 3637 0E35H 7637 1DD5H – 0 to 14bus 3 Target channel 3638 0E36H 7638 1DD6H – 0 to 2

Input assignment 2 3639 0E37H 7639 1DD7H – For details, see Table 10-12.Input assignment 1 3640 0E38H 7640 1DD8H – For details, see Table 10-11.Logic 3641 0E39H 7641 1DD9H – 0: OR 1: ANDDirect/reverse 3642 0E3AH 7642 1DDAH – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse actionRSW Type of action 3643 0E3BH 7643 1DDBH – 0 to 14bus 4 Target channel 3644 0E3CH 7644 1DDCH – 0 to 2

Input assignment 2 3645 0E3DH 7645 1DDDH – For details, see Table 10-12.Input assignment 1 3646 0E3EH 7646 1DDEH – For details, see Table 10-11.Logic 3647 0E3FH 7647 1DDFH – 0: OR 1: ANDDirect/reverse 3648 0E40H 7648 1DE0H – 0: Direct action

1: Reverse action RSW1 Input assignment 3 3649 0E41H 7649 1DE1H – For details, see Table 10-13.RSW2 3650 0E42H 7650 1DE2H –RSW3 3651 0E43H 7651 1DE3H –RSW4 3652 0E44H 7652 1DE4H –RSW bus1 Input assignment 3 3653 0E45H 7653 1DE5H – For details, see Table 10-13.RSW bus2 3654 0E46H 7654 1DE6H –RSW bus3 3655 0E47H 7655 1DE7H –RSW bus4 3656 0E48H 7656 1DE8H –

EV1 Output assignment 2 3701 0E75H 7701 1E15H – For details, see Table 10-9.Output assignment 1 3702 0E76H 7702 1E16H – For details, see Table 10-8.Logic 3703 0E77H 7703 1E17H – 0: OR 1: ANDLatch 3704 0E78H 7704 1E18H – 0: OFF

1: ON(latch in ON)2: ON(latch in OFF)

Direct/reverse 3705 0E79H 7705 1E19H – 0: Direct action1: Reverse action

EV2 Output assignment 2 3706 0E7AH 7706 1E1AH – For details, see Table 10-9.Output assignment 1 3707 0E7BH 7707 1E1BH – For details, see Table 10-8.Logic 3708 0E7CH 7708 1E1CH – 0: OR 1: ANDLatch 3709 0E7DH 7709 1E1DH – 0: OFF


Direct/reverse 3710 0E7EH 7710 1E1EH – 0: Direct action1: Reverse action

10-28



EV3 Output assignment 2 3711 0E7FH 7711 1E1FH – For details, see Table 10-9.Output assignment 1 3712 0E80H 7712 1E20H – For details, see Table 10-8.Logic 3713 0E81H 7713 1E21H – 0: OR 1: ANDLatch 3714 0E82H 7714 1E22H – 0: OFF



EV4 Output assignment 2 3716 0E84H 7716 1E24H – For details, see Table 10-9.Output assignment 1 3717 0E85H 7717 1E25H – For details, see Table 10-8.Logic 3718 0E86H 7718 1E26H – 0: OR 1: ANDLatch 3719 0E87H 7719 1E27H – 0: OFF



EV bus 1 Output assignment 2 3721 0E89H 7721 1E29H – For details, see Table 10-9.Output assignment 1 3722 0E8AH 7722 1E2AH – For details, see Table 10-8.Logic 3723 0E8BH 7723 1E2BH – 0: OR 1: ANDLatch 3724 0E8CH 7724 1E2CH – 0: OFF


Direct/reverse 3725 0E8DH 7725 1E2DH – 0: Direct action1: Reverse action

EV bus 2 Output assignment 2 3726 0E8EH 7726 1E2EH – For details, see Table 10-9.Output assignment 1 3727 0E8FH 7727 1E2FH – For details, see Table 10-8.Logic 3728 0E90H 7728 1E30H – 0: OR 1: ANDLatch 3729 0E91H 7729 1E31H – 0: OFF



EV bus 3 Output assignment 2 3731 0E93H 7731 1E33H – For details, see Table 10-9.Output assignment 1 3732 0E94H 7732 1E34H – For details, see Table 10-8.Logic 3733 0E95H 7733 1E35H – 0: OR 1: ANDLatch 3734 0E96H 7734 1E36H – 0: OFF



EV bus 4 Output assignment 2 3736 0E98H 7736 1E38H – For details, see Table 10-9.Output assignment 1 3737 0E99H 7737 1E39H – For details, see Table 10-8.Logic 3738 0E9AH 7738 1E3AH – 0: OR 1: ANDLatch 3739 0E9BH 7739 1E3BH – 0: OFF


Direct/reverse 3740 0E9CH 7740 1E3CH – 0: Direct action1: Reverse action

OUT1 Output assignment 2 3741 0E9DH 7741 1E3DH – For details, see Table 10-9.Output assignment 1 3742 0E9EH 7742 1E3EH – For details, see Table 10-8.Logic 3743 0E9FH 7743 1E3FH – 0: OR 1: ANDLatch 3744 0EA0H 7744 1E40H – 0: OFF


Direct/reverse 3745 0EA1H 7745 1E41H – 0: Direct action1: Reverse action

OUT2 Output assignment 2 3746 0EA2H 7746 1E42H – For details, see Table 10-9.Output assignment 1 3747 0EA3H 7747 1E43H – For details, see Table 10-8.Logic 3748 0EA4H 7748 1E44H – 0: OR 1: ANDLatch 3749 0EA5H 7749 1E45H – 0: OFF


Direct/reverse 3750 0EA6H 7750 1E46H – 0: Direct action1: Reverse action

10-29



OUT3 Output assignment 2 3751 0EA7H 7751 1E47H – For details, see Table 10-9.Output assignment 1 3752 0EA8H 7752 1E48H – For details, see Table 10-8.Logic 3753 0EA9H 7753 1E49H – 0: OR 1: ANDLatch 3754 0EAAH 7754 1E4AH – 0: OFF


Direct/reverse 3755 0EABH 7755 1E4BH – 0: Direct action1: Reverse action

OUT4 Output assignment 2 3756 0EACH 7756 1E4CH – For details, see Table 10-9.Output assignment 1 3757 0EADH 7757 1E4DH – For details, see Table 10-8.Logic 3758 0EAEH 7758 1E4EH – 0: OR 1: ANDLatch 3759 0EAFH 7759 1E4FH – 0: OFF


Direct/reverse 3760 0EB0H 7760 1E50H – 0: Direct action1: Reverse action

EV1 Output assignment 3 3761 0EB1H 7761 1E51H – For details, see Table 10-10.EV2 3762 0EB2H 7762 1E52H –EV3 3763 0EB3H 7763 1E53H –EV4 3764 0EB4H 7764 1E54H –

EV bus 1 Output assignment 3 3765 0EB5H 7765 1E55H – For details, see Table 10-10.EV bus 2 3766 0EB6H 7766 1E56H –EV bus 3 3767 0EB7H 7767 1E57H –EV bus 4 3768 0EB8H 7768 1E58H –

OUT1 Output assignment 3 3769 0EB9H 7769 1E59H – For details, see Table 10-10.OUT2 3770 0EBAH 7770 1E5AH –OUT3 3771 0EBBH 7771 1E5BH –OUT4 3772 0EBCH 7772 1E5CH –

– Data format 3802 0EDAH 7802 1E7AH X X – 0: 8bit EVEN 1st1: 8bit NO 2st

– Transmission speed 3803 0EDBH 7803 1E7BH X X – 0: 24001: 48002: 96003: 19200

– Min. communications 3804 0EDCH 7804 1E7CH – 0: 1ms, response time 2: 10ms

3: 100ms4: 200ms

– Min. communications 3805 0EDDH 7805 1E7DH – 0 to 100msresponse time (addition)

– Communications type 3806 0EDEH 7806 1E7EH – For details, see page 10-1.

10-30

Bit Information Data

Table 10-1: Representative all alarms

Note: The data of all 16 bits is obtained as the data of a single signed word (–32768 to +32767, 8000H to

7FFFH).

<Read example>When a PV error at PV channel 1 occurs, 1 and 9 turn ON simultaneously, and

send and response are as follows:

Send: RS, 1001W, 1

Response: 00, 257


16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Item Value Remarks

1 PV error representative The value becomes “1” if an error occurs PV upper/lower limit error, CJ error, B on even one of PV1 to PV4. line error

2 Internal data error The value becomes “1” if an error occurs Memory alarm has occurred in RAM or on even one of PV14 to PV16. EEPROM.

3 Reserved “0” at all times -4 Reserved “0” at all times -5 Reserved “0” at all times -6 CH1 motor adjustment error The value becomes “1” if the position The value of “1” is maintained until the7 CH2 motor adjustment error proportional motor adjustment does not power is reapplied or the adjustment

normally end. normally ends.8 Reserved “0” at all times9 PV error of PV channel 1 The value becomes “1” of an error occurs Either upper/lower limit alarm or A/D error

on even one of the bits related to PV has occurred in PV channel 1.channel 1 for PV input error.

10 PV error of PV channel 2 The value becomes “1” of an error occurs Either upper/lower limit alarm or A/D error on even one of the bits related to PV has occurred in PV channel 2.channel 2 for PV input error.



13 Reserved “0” at all times -14 RAM parameter checksum At error occurrence = 1 Checksum error in RAM (parameter area)

error15 RAM adjustment checksum At error occurrence = 1 Checksum error in RAM (adjustment area)

error16 EEPROM all areas At error occurrence = 1 Checksum error occurred in EEPROM.

checksum error

10-31

Table 10-2: PV alarm details


7FFFH).

Handling PrecautionsWhen the setting for using the remote SP is used, and the local SP isselected, the PV upper/lower alarm does not occur on the channel towhich the remote SP is entered.

PV upper/lower alarms when remote SP is used (word 3519, 7519 are set to “1”)


16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ItemPV channel 1 upper limit alarm

PV channel 2 upper limit alarm


Feedback input 1 Y line break


Feedback input 2 Y line break

PV channel 1 lower limit alarm



Feedback input 1 G line break


Feedback input 2 G line break

PV channel 1 CJ/BC linealarm



Feedback input 1 T line break


Feedback input 2 T line break

PV channel 1 A/D alarmPV channel 2 A/D alarmPV channel 3 A/D alarmPV channel 4 A/D alarm

ValueAt error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1

At error occurrence = 1

At error occurrence = 1

At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1

At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1At error occurrence = 1

RemarksAn error occurs when the range upperlimit+10% is exceeded.The manipulated variable is outputwhen a PV alarm occurs.*1No special action

Same as *1No special actionAn error occurs when the range upperlimit-10% is exceeded.The manipulated variable is outputwhen a PV alarm occurs.*2No special action

Same as *2No special actionCJ malfunction (thermocouple)B or C line break (RTD)The manipulated variable is outputwhen a PV alarm occurs.

CJ malfunction (thermocouple)B or C line break (RTD)The manipulated variable is outputwhen a PV alarm occurs.

CJ malfunction (thermocouple)B or C line break (RTD)The manipulated variable is outputwhen a PV alarm occurs.

No special action

CJ malfunction (thermocouple)

B or C line break (RTD)

The manipulated variable is outputwhen a PV alarm occurs.

No special action

An error occurs when the A/Dconverter does not function.

The manipulated variable is outputwhen a PV alarm occurs.

PV channel2-channel model4-channel model

During Local SP During Remote SP1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

ON OFF — — ON ON — —ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

ON: W/ PV upper/lower limit alarmOFF: W/out upper/lower limit alarm

10-32


Table 10-3: Control related status


7FFFH).

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ItemChannel 1 self-tuningcorrection/correctionstandbyChannel 1 currenttransformer measurementdisabled/enabledChannel 1 positionproportional inferencestateChannel 1 positionproportional adjustmentstateChannel 2 self-tuningcorrection/correctionstandbyChannel 2 currenttransformer measurementdisabled/enabledChannel 2 positionproportional inferencestateChannel 1 positionproportional adjustmentstateChannel 3 self-tuningcorrection/correctionstandbyChannel 3 currenttransformer measurementdisabled/enabledChannel 1 motor actioncloseChannel 1 motor actionopenChannel 4 self-tuningcorrection/correctionstandbyChannel 4 currenttransformer measurementdisabled/enabledChannel 2 motor actioncloseChannel 2 motor actionopen

ValueDuring correction standby = 1

When measurement is enabled = 1

0: Potentiometer feedback value inuse

1: Inferred feedback value in use0: Motor running1: Motor being adjusted

During correction standby = 1


0: Potentiometer feedback value inuse

1: Inferred feedback value in use0: Motor running1: Motor being adjusted



Output on the open side 0: OFF1: ON

Output on the close side 0: OFF1: ON



Output on the open side 0: OFF1: ON

Output on the close side 0: OFF1: ON

Remarks-

-

Meaningful only while positionproportional control being used


-

-



-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

10-33


Table 10-4: Internal calculation result of event output / external switch input (1044W)


7FFFH).

Table 10-5: External switch input state (1045W)


7FFFH).

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ItemEvent output internal calculation result 1Event output internal calculation result 2Event output internal calculation result 3Event output internal calculation result 4Event output internal calculation result 5Event output internal calculation result 6Event output internal calculation result 7Event output internal calculation result 8External switch input internal calculation result 1External switch input internal calculation result 2External switch input internal calculation result 3External switch input internal calculation result 4External switch input internal calculation result 5External switch input internal calculation result 6External switch input internal calculation result 7External switch input internal calculation result 8

Value0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON

RemarksInternal event calculationresult. This is thecalculation result of afunction indicated in theloader as event outputrelated and defined in anevent table. (It is not theoutput state of the outputterminal or external bus.)

External switch input calculationresult. This is the calculationresult of a function indicated inthe loader as “external switchinput.” (It is not the externalswitch input or external businput terminal state. For theinput terminal state, refer toTable 10-5.)

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ItemExternal switch input 1External switch input 2External switch input 3External switch input 4External switch bus input 1External switch bus input 2External switch bus input 3External switch bus input 4ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReserved

Value0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON“0” at all times“0” at all times“0” at all times“0” at all times“0” at all times“0” at all times“0” at all times“0” at all times

RemarksExternal switch models onlyExternal switch input terminal on/offstate.

External bus input on/off state

--------

10-34


Table 10-6: Event output/control output state (1046W)


7FFFH).

Table 10-7: Latch release


7FFFH).

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ItemEvent output 1Event output 2Event output 3Event output 4Event bus output 1Event bus output 2Event bus output 3Event bus output 4OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4ReservedReservedReservedReserved

Value0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ONNot fixedNot fixedNot fixedNot fixed

RemarksEvent output terminal on/off state.Enabled only on models with anevent output terminal. Indefinitevalue on other models.

External bus output on/off state

Control output terminal on/off state.(In the case of 2-channel models,value is indefinite as OUT3 andOUT4 do not have terminals)

----

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ItemEvent output 1Event output 2Event output 3Event output 4Event bus output 1Event bus output 2Event bus output 3Event bus output 4OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4ReservedReservedReservedReserved

Value0: No operation 1: Cancel0: No operation 1: Cancel0: No operation 1: Cancel0: No operation 1: Cancel0: No operation 1: Cancel0: No operation 1: Cancel0: No operation 1: Cancel0: No operation 1: Cancel0: No operation 1: Cancel0: No operation 1: Cancel0: No operation 1: Cancel0: No operation 1: Cancel“0” at all times“0” at all times“0” at all times“0” at all times

Remarks----------------

10-35


Table 10-8: Output assignments 1 (7702W, 7707W, etc.)


7FFFH).

Table 10-9: Output assignments 2 (7701W, 7706W, etc.)


7FFFH).

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ItemEV_TBL1 internal calculation resultEV_TBL2 internal calculation resultEV_TBL3 internal calculation resultEV_TBL4 internal calculation resultEV_TBL5 internal calculation resultEV_TBL6 internal calculation resultEV_TBL7 internal calculation resultEV_TBL8 internal calculation resultExternal switch input 1External switch input 2External switch input 3External switch input 4OUT1 control calculation resultOUT2 control calculation resultOUT3 control calculation resultOUT4 control calculation result


RemarksThe 1: ON bit state is used for output.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ItemRSW_TBL1 internal calculation resultRSW_TBL2 internal calculation resultRSW_TBL3 internal calculation resultRSW_TBL4 internal calculation resultRSW_TBL5 internal calculation resultRSW_TBL6 internal calculation resultRSW_TBL7 internal calculation resultRSW_TBL8 internal calculation resultExternal switching bus input 1External switching bus input 2External switching bus input 3External switching bus input 4Communications DI1Communications DI2Communications DI3Communications DI4


RemarksThe 1: ON bit state is usedfor output.

10-36


Table 10-10: Output assignments 3 (7761W to 7772W)

Note: The values ranging from -32768 to +32767 (i.e. 8000H to 7FFFH) are able to write. However, the

undefined bits do not operate because they are reserved. Always set to 0.

Table 10-11: Input assignments 1 (7604W, 7610W, etc.)


7FFFH).

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ItemCommunications DI5Communications DI6Communications DI7Communications DI8Communications DI9Communications DI10Communications DI11Communications DI12UndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefined


RemarksThe 1: ON bit state is usedfor output.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ItemExternal switch input 1External switch input 2External switch input 3External switch input 4External switching bus input 1External switching bus input 2External switching bus input 3External switching bus input 4EV_TBL1 internal calculation resultEV_TBL2 internal calculation resultEV_TBL3 internal calculation resultEV_TBL4 internal calculation resultEV_TBL5 internal calculation resultEV_TBL6 internal calculation resultEV_TBL7 internal calculation resultEV_TBL8 internal calculation result


RemarksThe 1: ON bit state is usedfor on/off of external switchinput.

10-37


Table 10-12: Input assignments 2 (7603W, 7609W, etc.)


7FFFH).

Table 10-13: Input assignments 3 (7649W to 7656W)

Note: The values ranging from -32768 to +32767 (i.e. 8000H to 7FFFH) are able to write. However, the

undefined bits do not operate because they are reserved. Always set to 0.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ItemReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedEvent output 1Event output 2Event output 3Event output 4Communications DI1Communications DI2Communications DI3Communications DI4

Value“0” at all times“0” at all times“0” at all times“0” at all times“0” at all times“0” at all times“0” at all times“0” at all times0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON0: OFF 1: ON

RemarksThe 1: ON bit state is used for on/offof external switch input.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ItemCommunications DI5Communications DI6Communications DI7Communications DI8Communications DI9Communications DI10Communications DI11Communications DI12UndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefined


RemarksThe 1: ON bit state is used for on/offof external switch input.

10-38


Table 10-14: Communications DI

Note: The values ranging from -32768 to +32767 (i.e. 0000H to FFFFH) are writable. However, the bits (13)

to (16) do not operate because they are reserved. Always set to 0.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ItemCommunications DI5Communications DI6Communications DI7Communications DI8Communications DI9Communications DI10Communications DI11Communications DI12UndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedtUndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefined


Remarks----------------

10-39


10 - 9 Detail Explanation on Communication Conditions

he parameters of which write conditions are changed according to various conditions are indicated as follows on

each type:

Target parameter

• Conditions under which writing cannot be made.

Write Conditions Parameters of which write conditions are changed according to operation mode

AUTO/MANUAL switching

• At ON/OFF control

Manual control output value

• At AUTO

• At ON/OFF control

Motor adjustment start

• At MANUAL

• At READY

• At generation of feedback input alarm

• Position proportional type of “3:MFB or 4:No MFB (position adjustment at

power supply application)”

• AT startup

AT start

• AT start assigned to RSW

• FB in adjustment

• ON/OFF in operation

• Reference: Writing can be made in MANUAL, READY and PV alarm

generation. However, AT does not start.

Parameters of which write conditions are changed according to other settings SP group switching

• At setting of single SP

LOCAL/REMOTE SP switching

• REMOTE/LOCAL switching set to RSW

• Setting to no use of RSP

• HEAT/COOL in use

PV range upper/lower limit values

• At range selection for thermocouple or RTD

Decimal point

• When a range number which cannot apply a decimal point to thermocouple or

RTD is selected .

When switching of each function is set to RSW function

• At SP group switching – SP group switching

• At AUTO/MANUAL switching – AUTO/MANUAL switching

• At RUN/READY switching – RUN/READY switching

• At LOCAL/REMOTE SP switching – LOCAL/REMOTE SP switching

• At AT start switching - AT start

• At switching to use inter-channel deviation control - switching to use inter-

channel deviation

10-40


Parameters of which other write conditions are changed SP group in use

• SP3 and SP4 selection on 4CH model

Communication conditions (transmission speed, communication system and

communication type)

• Setting from RS-485 (can set from loader only)

Parameters related with auxiliary output

Parameters (S type) related with position proportioning

Parameters (S type) related with heal/cool control

Parameters (S type) related with power saving

LOCAL/REMOTE SP switching (S type)

3/4CH target parameters (2ch model)

• Write conditions according to model number (write to a function not available)

Write Range

Parameters of which write range is changed according to other parameters SP value in use

Range number selected

SP group in use

• 2/4CH model

SP value

• Range number selected

MV upper/lower limit values

• AUX: available or not available

Event setting range (main and subsidiary)

• Event type


PV range upper/lower limit values

Self-tuning start-up band

• Range type

SP limit upper/lower limit values

• PV range upper/lower limit values

Parameters of which write range is changed according to model number Target channel of each parameter

• Setting of CH not available

Time proportional cycle

• Relay output and voltage output

10-41


Constant Write InhibitThe parameters below will not correctly function if constant writing is performed.

Write only one time when required.

Range No.

Temperature unit


SP value in use (only at use of standby reset for SP setting)

Use of heat/cool

Use of power saving

Position proportional control type

Selection of position proportional motor resister value

Control method

Proportional band

Reset time

Rate time

MV lower limit value

MV upper limit value

Manual reset

Self-tuning start-up band

Latch release (as becoming constant release status )

Auto-tuning start/stop

10 - 10 Cautions when Making Communications Programs for the Master Station

10-42


Pay attention to the following points when making communications programs:

• The longest response time on the device is two seconds. For this reason, set the response time-out to two

seconds.

• Resend the same message if there is no response within two seconds.

Set a communications error to occur if there is no response even after two retries.

• Be sure to make the above resends if the message cannot be send correctly due to the influence of noise,

for example, during communications.

NoteWhen the master station resends the message, alternatively use the device

judgment codes “X” and “x.” This is handy as you can tell whether or not the

received message is the previously received message.

Example of communications programThe program example shown here is written in Fujitsu F-BASIC 6.0 (Windows

version).

This program is given here as a reference when the user makes a program, and

does not assure all operations.

Check the communications conditions and device address of the device before

executing this program.

This program is used for reading and writing data. When the program is executed,

the application layers of the instruction message and response message

communicated are indicated.

• Communication settings

Set the device address of the other station to “ADDRESS.”

Open the RS-232C and call the subroutine *INIT_DATA.

• Data reading

After setting the read start data address to “READ_ADRS” and the number of

read data items to “READ_LEN”, call the subroutine *DATA_READ.

This program permits four data items to be read from data address “123”.

Change the setting to match the device used.

• Data writing

After setting the write start data address to “WRITE_ADRS”, the number of

write data items to “WRITE_LEN”, and the write data to “WRITE_DATA”, call

the subroutine *DATA_WRITE.

This program permits two data items to be written from data address “234”.

Change the setting to match the device used.

Instruction message application layerRS. 123W, 4Response message application layer00, 10, -20, 0, 40Instruction message application layerWS, 234W, 1, 1Response message application layer00

Example of execution results display

10-43

Data read/write sample programThe sample program is installed in the folder containing the installed loader.

In the standard installation, the sample program is as follows:

c : \programfiles\slp\slpd10\sample95.bas

Handling PrecautionsYamatake Corporation shall not be liable for any damages resultingfrom the use of this program sample.


Chapter 11. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS11 - 1 Outline of Communications

11-1

FeaturesThe features of the DMC10's communications functions are as follows:

• Gives the option of CPL communications or MODBUS (ASCII, RTU)

communications.

• Up to 15 DMC10s can be connected to a single master station as a host device.

The CMC10B cannot be connected if MODBUS is used.

• When the communications specifications of the host device conform to the RS-

232C interface, RS-232C/RS-485 conversion can be performed by the

communications converter CMC10L (sold separately).

• Almost all of the parameters held by the device can be communicated.

For details on communications parameters, see "10-8 List of AllCommunications Parameters" (page 10-16).

• Two types of address arrangements are available for frequently used

parameters. Parameter groups that can be handled by single commands can be

selected according to the application.

• A maximum transmission speed of 19200bps is supported.

Initial SettingThe following setups are required for starting communications:

Communications Procedures

The communications procedure is as follows:

(1) The instruction message is sent from the host device (master station) to the

DMC10 unit (slave station) to communicate with.

(2) The slave station receives the instruction message, and performs read or write

processing according to the content of the message.

(3) The slave station sends a message corresponding to the processing content as

the response message.

(4) The master station receives the response message.

Setting Item

Communicationtype

Station address

Transmissionspeed

Data format

Min. responsetime

Factory Setting

0 : CPL

3 : 19200bps

0 : 8 bits, even parity, 1 stop bit

1 : 10ms

Setting Range

0 : CPL1 : MODBUS (ASCII format)2 : MODBUS (RTU format)

0 to F

0 : 2400bps1 : 4800bps2 : 9600bps3 : 19200bps

0 : 8 bits, even parity, 1 stop bit1 : 8 bits, no parity, 2 stop bits

0 : 1ms1 : 10ms2 : 100ms3 : 200ms

Setting Location

Set on PC Loader.

Set on rotary switchfor station address.

Set on PC Loader.

Set on PC Loader.

Set on PC Loader.

11 - 2 Message Structure

11-2

Message StructureThe below shows the message structure.

All messages are expressed in hexadecimals.

MODBUS ASCIIAll messages other than delimiters are written in hexadecimal ASCII codes.

A message of MODBUS (ASCII) consists of (1) to (6) below.

(3) stores commands, which are transmission contents from the master station and

responses, which are transmission contents from the slave station.

All messages use ASCII codes. (Each slot below corresponds to one character.)(1) Beginning of message (expressed with ASCII code 3AH: colon)

(2) Station address (2 bytes)(3) Transmission message, response message(4) Checksum (2-byte LRC)(5) CR (delimiter)(6) LF (delimiter)

• Colon (3AH)

When a colon is received, it has the same function as STX of CPL. See

"Description of data items/STX" of CPL communications.

• Station address

Has the same function as that of the CPL station address. See

" Description of data items" (page 10-4), for details.

• Checksum (LRC)



However, the method of creating a checksum is different from that of CPL.

Checksum creation method

(1) Add transmission data in 1-byte units starting from the character next to

the colon (3AH) at the beginning of a message. (Note that the value to be

added is not an ASCII character value of the transmission message but

the transmission data before converted to an ASCII character. It is (2) to

(3) in the figure above that are added.)

(2) Find a 2's complement of the addition result.

(3) Convert the lower 1 byte of the addition result to a character code.

• CR/LF

Has the same function as that of CR/LF of CPL. See


Chapter 11. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS

3AH 0DH

:

0AH

CR LF

(3) (4) (5)(1) (2) (6)

1frame

11-3

MODBUS RTUAll messages are written in binary data.

A MODBUS (RTU) message consists of (1) to (3) below.

(2) stores commands, which are transmission contents from the master station and

responses, which are transmission contents from the slave station.

All messages use binary data. (Each slot below corresponds to one character.)(1) Station address (1 byte)

(2) Transmission message, response message(3) Checksum (2 bytes)

• Station address



• Checksum



However, unlike CPL, the method of creating a checksum carries out a CRC

check.

The checksum (CRC) creation method is shown below.


/* CRC calculation *//* Input unsigned char length :Number of transmission bytes *//* unsigned char *top :Transmission data start pointer *//* Output unsigned short CRC :CRC calculation result */unsigned short crc16( unsigned char length, unsigned char *top )

unsigned short CRC= 0xffff;unsigned short next;unsigned short carry;unsigned short n;unsigned char crcl;

while ( length-- ) next = (unsigned short)*top;CRC ^= next;for (n = 0; n < 8; n++)

carry = CRC & 1;CRC >>= 1;if (carry)

CRC ^= 0xA001;

top++;

crcl = (CRC & 0xff00)>>8;CRC <<= 8;CRC |= crcl;

return CRC;

1frame

(1) (2) (3)

11-4

• 1-frame end judgment

A message end (1-frame end) is determined when a time specified for each

transmission speed has passed during which no character is received. It is

considered that 1 frame has ended when the following character is not received

by the time the following timeout time passes.

However, the timeout time has a fluctuation of +/-1 ms from values in the

following table.

Table 1.5

Transmission MessageDetails of a transmission message are as follows.

Response TimeThe time after one full frame of a transmission message is received until the

instrument starts to reply a response message is a time (ms) expressed by

"minimum communications response time + minimum communications response

time (added value) + timeout time".

See " Min. communications response time" and

" Min. communications response time added value (ms)" (page 8-14),

for details.

Other SpecificationsSee "10-7 Reception and Transmission Timing" (page 10-15), for details.

• Supports MODBUS Class 0.

• Error end code 01: Command error

02: Address error

03: Data error

• Maximum communications data word count

• Other

For details of the MODBUS specification, see OPEN MODBUS/TCP

SPECIFICATION (Release 1.0) of MODBUS Corporation.


Set Transmission Speed(bps)

2400

4800

9600

19200

Timeout Time

20 ms or more

10 ms or more

5 ms or more

5 ms or more

Item

Command Read

Write

Word address

Read count

Write value

Content

RTU (binary notation)

03H

10H

03E9H

—

Numerical value expressedin binaries, word units

ASCII (ASCII character notation)

"03"

"10"

"03E9"

Numerical value expressed incharacters, 1-word units

—

Data count

03 (READ)

10 (WRITE)

ASCII

16

16

RTU

32

32

11 - 3 Description of Commands

This protocol is compliant to Modicon's MODBUS protocol.

MODBUS communication DMC10 supported has two encoding, RTU encoding and ASCII encoding.

Conformance class of that is Class 0.

RTU Encoding

Structure of request• Request of reading multiple registers (Function code: 03 hex.)

NoteDevice address: Our product address

(ex. This is on the front panel in case of DMC10)Resister address: See the communication table of each product manualWord count: Number of resister you want to read (This is up to 32)CRC: See the Modicon's Specification or see sample program 11-3 page

• Request of writing multiple resisters (Function code: 10 hex.)

NoteDevice address: Our product address

(ex. This is on the front panel in case of DMC10)Resister address: See the communication resister table of each product manualWord count: Number of resister you want to read (This is up to 32)Byte count: byte count = 2 x word count (This is up to 64)Resister value: Data you want to writeCRC: See the Modicon's Specification or see sample program 11-3 page

Structure of response• Response of reading multiple resisters

NoteDevice address: Device address: Product address you readByte count: 2 x Number of resister you readResister value: Data you readCRC: See the Modicon's Specification or see sample program 11-3 page

• Response of writing multiple resisters

NoteDevice address: Product address you wroteResister address: Resister address you wroteWord count: Number of resister you wroteCRC: See the Modicon's Specification or see sample program 11-3 page

11-5


Device address FunctionCode Resister address Word count CRC Time out

1byte 03 (hex.) 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes See Table 1.5 (11-4 page)

Device address FunctionCode Resister address Word count Byte count Resister values CRC Time out

1byte 10 (hex.) 2bytes 2bytes 1byte (byte count) bytes 2bytes See Table 1.5 (11-4 page)

Device address FunctionCode Byte count Resister values CRC Time out

1byte 03 (hex.) 1byte (byte count) bytes 2bytes See Table 1.5 (11-4 page)

Device address FunctionCode Resister address Word count CRC Time out

1byte 10 (hex.) 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes See Table 1.5 (11-4 page)

11-6

Structure of exception response• Exception response of reading multiple resisters

NoteDevice address: Product address you wroteException code: See table1.3CRC: See the Modicon's Specification or see sample program 11-3 page

• Exception response of writing multiple resisters

NoteDevice address: Product address you wroteException code: See table1.3CRC: See the Modicon's Specification or see sample program 11-3 page

Table 1.3: Exception code

ASCII Encoding

Structure of request• Request of reading multiple registers (Function code: 03)

NoteStart code: Start of requestDevice address: Our product address

(ex. This is on the front panel in case of DMC10)Resister address: See the communication table of each product manualWord count: Number of resister you want to read (This is up to 16)LRC: Add from the character next to the start code to resister

values together and complement itDelimiter: CR codeDelimiter: LF code


Device address FunctionCode Exception code CRC Time out

1byte 83 (hex.) 1byte 2bytes See Table 1.5 (11-4 page)

Device address Function code Exception code CRC Time out

1byte 90 (hex.) 1byte 2bytes See Table 1.5 (11-4 page)

Code Contents Cause

1 Illegal Function Undefined function code

2 Illegal Data address Undefined data address

3 Illegal Data value Data range overNote:Go on writing except range over data

Start code Device address Function code Resister address Word count LRC Delimiter Delimiter

: 2chars 03 (hex.) 4chars 4chars 2chars CR LF

11-7

• Request of writing multiple resisters (Function code: 10)

NoteStart code: Start of requestDevice address: Our product address

(ex. This is on the front panel in case of DMC10)Resister address: See the communication resister table of each product manualWord count: Number of resister you want to read (This is up to 16)Byte count: byte count = 2 x word count (This is up to 64)Resister value: Data you want to writeLRC: Add from the character next to the start code to resister


Structure of response• Response of reading multiple resisters

NoteStart code: Start of requestDevice address: Product address you readByte count: 2 x Number of resister you readResister value: Data you readLRC: Add from the character next to the start code to resister


• Response of writing multiple resisters

NoteStart code: Start of requestDevice address: Product address you wroteResister address: Resister address you wroteWord count: Number of resister you wroteLRC: Add from the character next to the start code to resister



Start code Device address Function code Resister address Word count Byte count Resister values LRC Delimiter Delimiter

: 2chars 10 (hex.) 4chars 4chars 2chars (2 x byte count)chars 2chars CR LF

Start code Device address Function code Byte count Resister values LRC Delimiter Delimiter

: 2chars 03 (hex.) 2chars (2 x byte count) chars 2 chars CR LF

Start code Device address Function code Resister address Word count LRC Delimiter Delimiter

: 2chars 10 (hex.) 4chars 4chars 2chars CR LF

11-8

Structure of exception response• Exception response of reading multiple resisters

NoteStart code: Start of requestDevice address: Product address you wroteException code: See table2.3LRC: Add from the character next to the start code to resister


• Exception response of writing multiple resisters

NoteStart code: Start of requestDevice address: Product address you wroteException code: See table2.3LRC: Add from the character next to the start code to resister


Table 2.3: Exception code


Start code Device address Function code Exception code LRC Delimiter Delimiter

: 2chars 83 (hex.) 2chars 2chars CR LF

Start code Device address Function code Exception code CRC Delimiter Delimiter

: 2chars 90 (hex.) 2chars 2chars CR LF

Code Contents Cause

1 Illegal Function Undefined function code

2 Illegal Data address •Undefined data address•Undefined character code of data address

3 Illegal Data value •Data range overNote:Go on writing except range over data

•Undefined character code of data valueNote: Go on reading or writing until undefined character code

appeared

Chapter 12. ADJUSTMENT & ZENER BARRIER ADJUSTMENT

12-1

This chapter describes how to adjust the DMC10.

Handling PrecautionsYamatake accepts no liability regarding trouble arising from wrongfuladjustment of the DMC10 by the user.The DMC10 can be restored to its original default adjusted state during theadjustment by selecting [Command]-[Restore Data] in the pull-down menuand discarding the adjustment data set so far. Note that all the adjustmentsettings made by the user so far will be lost if this procedure is performedmistakenly during adjustment.

Precautions before AdjustmentObserve the following during adjustment:

• Supply power to the DMC10 for at least one hour before starting the adjustment.

Failure to do so might result in faulty accuracy.

• Make sure that the ambient temperature in which the DMC10 is adjusted

conforms to the reference conditions stipulated in the DMC10’s specifications.


• Do not adjust the DMC10 in locations where it is subject to wind or ambient

temperature fluctuations.


• Do not adjust the DMC10 using equipment that fails to satisfy the specifications

indicated in the item “ Measurement Equipment Required forAdjustment” below.


Measurement Equipment Required for Adjustment

Adjustment Procedure

Inspecting each I/O(1) Select the [Inspect I/O] tab.

(2) Select the desired item from among the inspection items.

(3) Press the [Execute] key.

Inputs (external switch input, etc.) can be read continuously. So, cause an input at

the input terminal of the DMC10, and display the ON/OFF state on the display.

With outputs (event output, etc.), the setting (ON/OFF) marked in the checkbox is

output to the output terminal of the DMC10.

Measuring Device

Referencecurrent/voltagegenerator

Resistor

Ammeter

Thermometer

Specifications

Accuracy ±0.1% or less, min. resolution 100µV or less (voltage)min. resolution 100µA or less (current)

Accuracy ±0.1% or less, min. resolution 0.1Ω or less

Accuracy ±0.1% or less, min. resolution 1µA or less

Accuracy ±0.1°C or less, min. resolution 0.1°C or less

12-2

+

–

13

15

14Generator

Gain 1, 2, 5, 6

+

–

18

20

19Generator

Gain 1, 2, 5, 6

+

–

21

23

22Generator

Gain 1, 2, 5, 6

+

–

26

28

27Generator

Gain 1, 2, 5, 6

13

15

14Resistor

Gain 3, 4

18

20

19Resistor

Gain 3, 4

21

23

22Resistor

Gain 3, 4

26

28

27Resistor

Gain 3, 4

+

–

13

15

14Generator

Gain 7

+

–

18

20

19Generator

Gain 7

+

–

21

23

22Generator

Gain 7

+

–

26

28

27Generator

Gain 7

C

B

A

C

B

A

A

B

C

A

B

C

ch1

ch2

ch3

ch4


Adjusting PV input

Handling PrecautionsAll gains must be adjusted when performing PV input adjustment.

(1) Select the [Adjust PV Input] tab.(2) Select the target channel to be adjusted.(3) Select the gain starting from the smallest number, and adjust all gains. Start

from gain number “01”.(4) Select [Zero] at the zero span selection item.

This is because zero/span are in a set for each single gain item. Select the gain,be sure to execute [Zero] and then execute [Span].

(5) Press the [Read] key.(6) Apply the zero applied voltage/current/resistance for the gain selected at the

target customer terminal. For details on the connection method when applyingthese, refer to the following figures.

(7) Hold the applied state for about 30 seconds. Note, however, that this is not thecase when the terminal is left open for a long time before applying the above.For this reason, set the terminal to the 0V state (or short circuit acrossterminals) before applying the above.

(8) Press the [Execute] key.(9) Return to the zero span selection at step (4), select [Span] and execute steps

(5) to (8)on the span side. When the zero/span adjustment is completed for asingle gain, proceed to the next step.

(10) Return to the gain selection at step (3), move to the next higher gain number,and repeat steps (3) to (9).

(11) When you have completed adjusting all gains within the selected channel,return to selection of the channel that you want to adjust as described in step(2), and repeat adjustment of the remaining channels following the sameprocedure as described above.

12-3

Adjusting cold junction compensationWith this adjustment, leave the DMC10 for at least one hour with all I/Os in an

OFF state.

Failure to do so might result in faulty adjustment of this item.

(1) Select the [Adjust Terminal Temperature] tab.

(2) Select the target channel to be adjusted.

(3) Press the [Read] key.

(4) Connect the thermometer to the terminal.

(5) For details on the connection method, refer to the following figures.

13

15

14 Thermometer

ch118

20

19 Thermometer

ch221

23

22 Thermometer

ch326

28

27 Thermometer

ch4


(6) Make the connection, and wait for about five minutes.

(7) Enter the thermometer value while the thermometer is indicating.

(8) Press the [Execute] key.

(9) Return to selection of the channel that you want to adjust as described, and

repeat adjustment of the remaining channels following the same procedure as

described above.

Adjusting wiring resistance(1) Select the [Adjust Wiring Resistance] tab.


(3) Select [Zero] at the zero span selection item.

This is because zero/span are in a set for a single channel. Select channel gain,

be sure to execute [Zero] and then execute [Span].(4) Press the [Read] key.

(5) Apply the zero resistance for the channel selected at the target customer

terminal. For details on the connection method when applying these, refer to

the following figures.

13

15

14Resistor

ch118

20

19Resistor

ch221

23

22Resistor

ch326

28

27Resistor

ch4

(6) Hold the applied state for about 30 seconds.

Note, however, that this is not the case when the terminal is left open for a long

time before applying the above. For this reason, set the terminal to the 0V state

(or short circuit across terminals) before applying the above.

(7) Press the [Write] key.

(8) Return to the zero span selection at step (3), select [Span] and execute steps

(5) to (8) on the span side. When the zero/span adjustment is completed for a

single channel, proceed to the next step.

12-4

(9) Return to selection of the channel that you want to adjust as described in step

(2), and repeat adjustment of the remaining channels following the same

procedure as described above.

Adjusting CT input(1) Select the [Adjust CT Input] tab.



This is because zero/span are in a set for each single channel. Select the

channel, be sure to execute [Zero] and then execute [Span].(4) Press the [Read] key.

(5) Apply the zero or span current value for the channel selected at the target

customer terminal. For details on the connection method when applying this,

refer to the following figures.


+

–

+

–

21

22Generator

ch126

27Generator

ch2




(5) to (8) on the span side. When the zero/span adjustment is completed for a

single channel, proceed to the next step.




Adjust AUX output(1) Select the [Adjust Voltage Output] tab.



This is because zero/span are in a set for each single channel. Select the

channel, be sure to execute [Zero] and then execute [Span].(4) Press the [Read] key.

(5) Apply the zero or span current value for the channel selected at the target

customer terminal.

For details on the measurement method, refer to the following figures.

+

–

+

–

21

22Ammeter

ch126

27Ammeter

ch2

12-5


(7) Read the current on the ammeter in mA units down to three digits past the

decimal point, enter the value on screen, and press the [Write] key.


(5) to (8) on the span side.

When the zero/span adjustment is completed for a single channel, proceed to

the next step.




About Zener Barrier AdjustmentWhen RTD input is combined with Zener barriers for use on the DMC10, the

DMC10 must be adjusted to compensate for deviation in the resistance values of

the Zener barriers.

Generally, the internal impedance of a Zener barrier is large. For this reason, use a

Zener barrier that matches the allowable wiring resistance specifications of the

resistance temperature detector.

Zener barriers made by Yamatake have an internal impedance of about 70Ω. So,

they can be used in DMC10’s ranges 21, 24, 27 or 28.

(1) Wire as shown in the following figure.

DMC10B

A

CZener barrier

Zener barrier

Zener barrierRTD


(2) Select Zener barrier adjustment in [Setup Function]-[Setup] on SLP-D10.

Handling PrecautionsZener barrier adjustment is performed at [Menu]-[Setup] on the loader.This adjustment item is not included in [Adjust].

(3) Designate the PV channel to be adjusted.

(4) Press the [Read] key.



(7) To continue adjusting another channel, repeat steps (3) to (6) of this procedure.

Chapter 13. TROUBLESHOOTING

Trouble is broadly classified into the following types:

• PV input related trouble

• Body alarms related trouble

• Loader communications related trouble

• Host communications related trouble

• Control related trouble

How to Use the LEDs on the Front Panel When Checking AlarmsThe below types of operation can be assigned to the LEDs on the front panel of the

DCM10 in the settings. Operation, for example, when an error occurs can be

checked by the lit state of the LEDs.

In particular, regarding communications states, you can tell at a glance whether or

not communications has been established.

13-1

*1 Blinks when reception is successful at the self device address.

ItemLED operationtype

Description0: No function1: Blinking in READY mode2: Blinking in MANUAL mode3: Blinking in RSP mode4: Blinking at self-tuning correction

standby 5: Blinking at execution of auto-tuning6: Blinking at PV alarm occurrence7: Blinking at memory alarm occurrence8: SP set selection number blinking9: Blinking during master

communications *110: Blinking during master/loader

communications11: MV relay state

(lit when ON)12: Event relay state

(lit when ON)13: External bus calculation result

(lit when ON)14: Physical DI input state

(lit when ON)15: External bus mode

(lit when ON)16: Communications DI input mode

(lit when ON)17: Blinking during inter-channel

deviation control18: Blinking during SP gradient time19: Inference of motor control position in

progress

Factory Setting0: No function

13-2

PV Input Related TroubleThe following table shows PV input related trouble:


Body Alarms Related TroubleThe below table shows body alarms related trouble. If an error occurs, in many

cases, the device body is malfunctioning, and repair or replacement is necessary.

You can check at “Alarm” in the monitor mode on the loader which of the

following trouble applies:

Description of Fault• Indicated value is out of

range.• PV upper limit or PV lower

limit alarm occurred onloader.

• PV value fluctuates.

• PV value stays fixed anddoes not change.

Cause• The sensor is not connected.• In the case of a sensor that requires

a power supply, appropriate poweris not being supplied.

• Sensor fault is causing the inputvalue to exceed the upper limit orlower limit values.

• The wiring to the sensor is broken.

• Terminal screws are loose.• PV input terminals on unused

channels are in an open state.• The device is faulty.

• The device is influenced by externalnoise.

• The control method is incorrect.• The control constants are not

appropriate values.• The terminal screws are loose and

are causing faulty contacts.• The device is faulty.

• The sensor is faulty.• In the case of a sensor that requires

a power supply, appropriate poweris not being supplied.

• The device is faulty.(lit when ON)

Remedy• Connect the wiring to the sensor.• Check if power is being supplied. If it

is, check the voltage value.

• Check the sensor. Replace if faulty.

• Check the connector leads. Replaceif abnormal.

• Tighten the screws.• Short-circuit PV inputs on unused

channels.• Contact Yamatake or your Yamatake

agent.

• Adopt noise countermeasures.

• Change the control method.• Perform auto-tuning.• Manually enter the PID constants.• Tighten the screws.

• Contact Yamatake or your Yamatakeagent.

• Check the sensor. Replace if faulty.


Description of Fault

• CJ (cold junctioncompensation function)error

• B line break state

• A/D conversion function

• RAM parameter checksumerror

• RAM adjustment checksumerror

• EEPROM all areaschecksum error

Cause

• The cold junction compensationfunction is faulty.

• In the case of RTD input, the B lineto the sensor is broken.

• The A/D converter on the PV inputsection is faulty.

• Noise or device fault is causing achecksum error in the RAM data.

• Noise or device fault is causing achecksum error in the RAM data.

• Noise, etc. has damaged the data inEEPROM.

Remedy


• Check the connector leads. Replace ifabnormal.


• Turn the power OFF then back ONagain. If this does not correct theproblem, contact Yamatake or yourYamatake agent.

• Turn the power OFF then back ONagain. If this does not correct theproblem, contact Yamatake or yourYamatake agent.


13-3

Loader Communications Related TroubleCheck the following if communications with the personal computer loader is not

established via the loader jack on the front panel of the device:


Host Communications Related TroubleCheck the following if communications with the personal computer, PLC or other

host device is not established by the RS-485 communications functions on the

device body:


• Writing to the DMC10 is notpossible from the personalcomputer in the Setupscreen.

• Data cannot be uploadedto the DMC10 from thepersonal computer in theSetup screen.

• The numerical monitorcannot be started in theNumerical Monitor screen.

• The trend monitor cannotbe started in the TrendMonitor screen.

• Data cannot be read in theAdjust screen.

Cause

• The loader cable is not correctlyinserted into the front panel port onthe DMC10.

• The loader cable is not inserted intothe correct communications port onthe personal computer.

• The authorised cable is not used.• A break or other abnormality has

occurred on the cable.• The setting of the loader’s

communications port is in error.• Appropriate power is not being

supplied to the DMC10.

Remedy

• Check the wiring state of the loadercable.

• Check the communications port of thepersonal computer to which the loadercable is currently connected.

• Check the settings of the loader’scommunications port.

• Replace the cable.• Make sure that appropriate power is

being supplied to the DMC10.


• No response incommunications

• A communicationsresponse indicating anerror content has beenreturned.

Cause

• Wiring is not performed to thecorrect terminals.

• A break has occurred in the wiring.• The screws are loose.• The address setting for the DMC10

is in error.• The transmission speed does not

match the device setting.

• The communications conditions donot match the device setting.

• The device address of the sendmessage is in error.

• The format of the send message isin error.

• The send message contains achecksum whose content is in error.

• The terminating resistor is used.

• Communications timing is notcorrect.

The send message is in error.

Remedy

• Wire to the correct terminals.

• Replace the connector lead.• Tighten the screws.• Correctly set the address on the front

panel on the DMC10.• Check the transmission speed on the

personal computer loader, and correctthe settings.

• Check the communications conditionson the personal computer loader, andcorrect the settings.

• Correct the device address of thesend message.

• Correct the format of the sendmessage.

• Check and correct the content of thechecksum.

• Remove the terminating resistor.

See “10-7 Reception andTransmission Timing” (page 10-15).

See “10-6 List of Status Codes” (page10-14).

13-4

Control Related TroubleThe below table shows control related trouble. Note, however, that it is sometimes

difficult to alleviate these troubles by measures performed only on the control

device due to the characteristics of the control device or the structure of the

instrumentation.


*Note that controllability sometimes drops when these remedies areperformed.


• It takes a long time to startup.

• The PV value is unstable.

• Overshoot at startup islarge.

• Tuning does not end.

• Control signals repeatedlyturn ON and OFF morethan necessary.

Cause

• Suitable control constants are notbeing input.

• The startup time of the control targetitself is long.

• Self-tuning and interference orintermittent disturbance is causingPID constants to be extremely largevalues.



• Minute fluctuations in the PV valuedo not come to a stop.

• The time proportional cycle is short.• Control output values are fluctuating

excessively.• The differential is large in ON/OFF

control.

Remedy

• Start up auto-tuning.

• Increase the capabilities of the controldevice.

• Set the PID values to their defaults,and either set the control method to“control by PID fixed values”, or setthe self-tuning correction width to “0”.



• Set the value of the PV filter to about1 or 2 seconds.*

• Increase the time proportional cycle.*• Change the “time proportional

operating mode” setting to “priority oncontrol device life.”*

• Increase the differential value.*• Set the value of the PV filter to about

1 or 2 seconds.*

Chapter 14. SPECIFICATIONS14 - 1 General Specifications

Environmental Conditions

14-1

ConditionsReference conditions

Operating conditions

Transport/storageconditions

Other specifications

ItemAmbient temperatureAmbient humidityPower voltageVibration resistanceImpact resistanceMounting angleAmbient temperatureAmbient humidityRated power voltagePermissible operatingpower voltageVibration resistance

Impact resistanceMounting angleAmbient temperatureAmbient humidityVibration resistance

Impact resistance

Package drop test

Memorization systemInsulation resistance

Dielectric strength

Power consumption

Rush current at power ONCase material, colorMounting methodScrew tightening torque

MassExternal dimensions

Specifications23±2°C60±5%RH (condensation not allowed)24Vdc±5%0m/s2

0m/s2

(reference plane) ±3°0 to 50°C10 to 90%RH (condensation not allowed)24Vdc24Vdc±10%

0 to 1.96m/s2 (10 to 60Hz, for 2h in each of XYZaxes)0 to 9.81m/s2 (3 times)(reference plane) ±10°–20 to +70°C10 to 95%RH (condensation not allowed)0 to 4.90m/s2 (10 to 60Hz, for 2h in each of XYZaxes)0 to 196m/s2 (DIN rail-mounted state, 3 times invertical direction)0 to 392m/s2 (wall-mounted state, 3 times invertical direction)Drop height 60cm (free fall on 1 corner, 3 sides, 6planes)Non-volatile memoryMin. 20MΩ Across power terminal and secondaryterminal (by 500Vdc insulation testing set)500Vac, 1min Across power terminal andsecondary terminal/caseDMC10S/DMC10D types: Max. 5W (underoperating conditions)DMC10E type: Max. 3W (under operatingconditions)Max. 10A (under operating conditions)Polycarbonate resin, light grayDIN rail or screwsBase M3.5 screw 0.8 to 1.0 N·mTerminal wiring model M3.5 screw 0.8 to 1.0 N·mConnector wiring model Connector terminal

0.5 to 0.6N·mConnector mount0.5 to 0.6N·m

Max. 200g30 x 100 x 110mm (For details, see externaldimension drawings.)

14 - 2 Performance Specifications

14-2

PV Input

Chapter 14. SPECIFICATIONS

Operation at a thermocouple input line break

Operation at an RTD input line break (BC line alarm occurs when allowable wiringresistance is exceeded.)

*1: Can be changed by setting.*2: Ranges 21 and 24 cannot be detected.

Operation at a linear input line break

* Can be changed by setting.

Break CircumstancesThermocouple break

Movement of PV ValueUp scale

Alarm IndicationUpper limit alarm

Control OutputAccording to setting

Event OutputOperation continued*

Break/Short-circuitCircumstances

Register breakA line breakB line break

C line break

2 or more lines break

A, B lines short-circuitedA, C lines short-circuited

Movement ofPV Value

Up scaleUp scaleUp scale

Down scale

Up scale

Down scale*2Down scale*2

Alarm Indication

Upper limit alarmUpper limit alarmUpper limit alarm, BC line alarmLower limit alarm, BC line alarmUpper limit alarm, BC line alarmLower limit alarm*2Lower limit alarm *2

Control Output

According to settingAccording to settingAccording to setting

According to setting

According to setting

According to settingAccording to setting

Event Output

Operation continued*1Operation continued*1Operation continued*1

Operation continued*1

Operation continued*1

Operation continued*1Operation continued*1

Break CircumstancesVoltage range breakCurrent range break

Movement of PV ValueUp scaleDown scale

Alarm IndicationUpper limit alarmLower limit alarm

Control OutputAccording to settingAccording to setting

Event OutputOperation continued*Operation continued*

Conditions Specifications

Input type Thermocouple K, J, E, T, R, S, B : JIS C 1602-1995DIN U, DIN L : DIN43710-1985PLII : Engelhard Industries documents(IPTS68)

RTD Pt100 : JIS C 1604-1997JPt : JIS C 1604-1989

Linear (DC current) 4 to 20mALinear (DC voltage) 1 to 5V, 0 to 5V, 0 to 1V

Input sampling cycle 500msIndication accuracy DMC10S DMC10D

±0.5%FS ±1 digit ±0.3%FS +/-1 digitThe negative area of the thermocouple The negative area of the thermocouple±1.0%FS ±1 digit ±0.6%FS ±1 digitFor the thermocouple B For the thermocouple BUnder 260°C ±5.0%FS ±1U Under 260°C ±-5.0%FS ±1U260 to 800°C ±2.0%FS ±1U 260 to 800°C ±1.0%FS ±1U800 to 1800°C ±1.0%FS ±1U 800 to 1800°C ±0.5%FS ±1U

Input bias current •Thermocouple: Max. 0.2µA (under reference conditions)•RTD: Approx. 1mA, current flowing from A terminal•Linear: Max. 5µA (under reference conditions)

Allowable wiring •Thermocouple: Max. 250Ω (total of all leads)resistance •RTD (range 21, 24, 27, 28): Max. 80Ω (per lead)

•RTD (range 22, 23, 25, 26, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34): Max. 10Ω (per lead)•Linear: Max. 250Ω (total of all leads)

Influence of wiring •Thermocouple: Max. ±0.2µV/Ωresistance •RTD: Max. ±0.05%FS/Ω

•Linear: Max. ±5µV/ΩInput impedance Max. 120Ω (4 to 20mA input range)Allowable Max. 4V (a higher voltage might cause device failure)input Voltage

*: Can be changed by setting.

14-3

Unused channel range tableWhen there is an unused channel, control output and PV alarm output turn OFF by

setting to the range Nos. in the following table: PV input processing to unused

channels is not required.


Thermocouple PV input type/range table

* : The minimum resolution of these ranges is 1, 0.1°C only on theadvanced model DMC10D.

RTD PV input type/range table

Linear input PV input type/range table

Range No.00

SpecificationsPV value: Fixed at 0°C, control output: OFF, PV alarm: OFF

Range No.41424344

Sensor Symbol4-20mA

1-5V0-5V0-1V

Programmable Range–2000 to +10000–2000 to +10000–2000 to +10000–2000 to +10000

Min. Resolution (°C)1, 0.1, 0.01, 0.0011, 0.1, 0.01, 0.0011, 0.1, 0.01, 0.0011, 0.1, 0.01, 0.001

Input Range4 to 20mA

1 to 5V0 to 5V0 to 1V

When the position proportionalcontrol type of 1 is used, theinferred position control is used.

Action at the time of feedback input line break

Break Circumstances Behavior of Position Proportional Control Alarm Indication Control OutputT line break T line break alarm No changeY line break Y line break alarm No changeG line break G line break alarm No change

Range No. Sensor Symbol Temperature Range (°C) Min. Resolution (°C)

01 K:CA 0 to 1200 102 K:CA 0 to 600 103 K:CA 0 to 400 1 *04 K:CA -200 to +400 1 *05 J:IC 0 to 800 106 J:IC -200 to +400 1 *07 E:CRC 0 to 600 108 T:CC -200 to +400 1 *09 DINU -200 to +400 1 *10 DINL 0 to 800 111 R 0 to 1600 112 S 0 to 1600 113 PLII 0 to 1200 114 B 0 to 1800 1

Range No. Sensor Symbol Temperature Range (°C) Min. Resolution (°C)

21 Pt100 -200 to +500 122 Pt100 0 to 200 1, 0.123 Pt100 –50 to +100 1, 0.124 JPt100 –200 to +500 125 JPt100 0 to 200 1, 0.126 JPt100 –50 to +100 1, 0.127 Pt100 –100 to +300 128 JPt100 –100 to +300 129 Pt100 –50 to +150 1, 0.130 JPt100 –50 to +150 1, 0.131 Pt100 –75 to +175 1, 0.132 JPt100 –75 to +175 1, 0.133 Pt100 –100 to +200 1, 0.134 JPt100 –100 to +200 1, 0.1

14-4

Control output


Conditions Item SpecificationsRelay output Control method ON/OFF, time-proportional PID

Output type Relay outputContact configuration 1a (SPST, Normally Open)Contact rating 3A (30Vdc/250Vac, resistive load)Life 100,000 operations or moreMin. switching voltage/current 5V, 100mATime proportional output resolution 1/1000Time proportional output cycle 5s to 120s (set in 1s increments)Updating of time proportional Select the following in the setup:output • Output turns ON/OFF tracked to changes in the OUT value

that occur within the time proportional output cycle.• Output turns ON once within the time proportional output

cycle.Voltage output Control method ON/OFF, time-proportional PID(V) Output type Voltage drive system

Internal resistance 150Ω±5%Open terminal voltage 13Vdc±5%Load current Max. 30mA

Note:Care is required to prevent the device from being resetby actuation of the overcurrent protection function inthe internal power supply circuit when output is short-circuited.

OFF leakage current Max. 100µATime proportional output resolution 1/1000Time proportional output cycle 1s to 120s (set in 1s increments)Updating of time proportional Select the following in the setup:output • Output turns ON/OFF tracked to changes in the OUT value

that occur within the time proportional output cycle.• Output turns ON once within the time proportional output

cycle.Event output Number of points 2 or 4(DMC10S, Output type Relay contact output Voltage outputDMC10D model) Output rating Contact type: SPST Open voltage: 13Vdc±5%

Contact rating: 250Vac, 1A Internal resistance: 150Ω±530Vdc, 1A OFF leakage current: Max. 100µA

Life: 100,000 operations or Output current: Max. 30mAmore (resistive load)

Min. switching specification: 5V, 10mA

Auxiliary output Output type 0 to 20mAdc or 4 to 20mAdc, Selectable in the setup(AUX) Allowable load resistance Max. 510Ω

Output resolution Min. 1/10000Output content PV, SP, MV, inter-channelOutput updating cycle 500msOutput accuracy DMC10S: ±0.5%FS (under reference conditions)

DMC10D: ±0.3%FS (under reference conditions)Note: however, that 1mAdc or less is outside the guaranteed

accuracy.Event output Number of outputs 4DMC10E model) Output type Relay output

Contact configuration (EV2, 4) 1a (SPST, Normally Open)(EV1, 3) 1c (SPDT, Normally Open & Normally Closed)

Contact rating 1A 30Vdc/250Vac (resistive load)Life 100,000 operations or more (30 operation/min)Min. switching voltage/current 5V, 10mA

14-5


Conditions Item SpecificationsExternal Number of inputs 2 or 4switch input Input sampling time 100ms

Min. detection hold time Min. 100msParallel connection with other Can be connected in parallel directly with SDC10/SDC40.devices For details on other devices, consult a Yamatake sales agent.Connectable output type No-voltage contact or open-collectorOpen terminal voltage 13Vdc±10%Terminal current (short-circuit) Current flowing from terminal: 5mA (typ.) (under operating

conditions)Allowable ON contact resistance Max. 250Ω (under operating conditions)Allowable OFF contact resistance Min. 100kΩ (under operating conditions)Allowable ON residual voltage Max. 2V (under operating conditions)Allowable OFF leak current Max. 100µA (under operating conditions)

Current Current transformer used Sold separately QN206A (hole dia.: 5.8mm),transformer input QN212A (hole dia.: 12mm)

Measurement current range 0.4 to 50.0AIndication accuracy ±5%FSReception resistance Approx. 50ΩIndication resolution 0.1AInput sampling cycle 100ms

Host Signal level RS-485-compliantcommunications Transmission path connection Multi-point (max. 31 units per single host)

Communications system Half-duplexSynchronization Start-stop synchronizationTransmission control Polling/selectingMax. line length Max. 500mNumber of communications lines 3-lead systemTransmission speed error Max. 0.16%Terminator Terminator having equivalent terminal resistance built-in.

So, external terminator cannot be used.Transmission speed 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200bpsData length 8bitsStop bit 1 or 2bitsParity bit Even parity or no parity


Isolation between Inputs and OutputsThe following figure shows the mutual isolation between inputs and outputs:

*: When a voltage output type is selected, the power supply is not isolated.—: Isolated---: Not isolated

External Dimensions

DMC10S Unit: mm

DMC10E Unit: mm

Dimesion requiredfor mounting ontoand removal fromDIN rail Dimesion required

for mounting andremoval of the body

Dimesion requiredfor mounting ontoand removal fromDIN rail

Terminal block type Connector type

Dimesion requiredfor mounting andremoval of the body

PV CH1 OUT CH1 *PV CH2 OUT CH2 *PV CH3 OUT CH3 *PV CH4 Power supply OUT CH4 *RSW CH1 EVENT CH1RSW CH2 EVENT CH2RSW CH3 EVENT CH3*RSW CH4 EVENT CH4*CT CH1 AUX CH1CT CH2 Logic AUX CH2

Loader CPLcommunications communications

14-6

Appendix1. Advice on Control Constants

The DMC10 has the following three control methods:• ON/OFF control• Control by self-tuning• Control by PID fixed values

These control methods and related parameters are set at [Standard]-[Control Output] or [SP, Control].

ON/OFF ControlThis is the simplest control method. Though setting and operation is simple,controllability is worse than other control methods. The following settings arerequired for performing ON/OFF control.

• DifferentialThis is the setting for the difference between the ON point and OFF point. Thissetting is for avoiding frequent ON/OFF operation of the control device. A largedifferential setting prevents frequent ON/OFF operation of the control device,though controllability decreases. Alternatively, a small differential settingincreases controllability whereas the control device frequently turns ON andOFF.

• SP value

Control by Self-tuning“Self-tuning” is a function for starting PID tuning automatically on the controllerwhen the following operations are performed. Self-tuning frees the user from thetrouble of setting the PID constants even if the characteristics of the control targetfluctuate due to changing of the SP or work.

• When the SP (set point) has changed 5% or more of full scale (10% or more offull scale at initial startup when the control method has been set to “control byself-tuning”)

• When a deviation of the parameter self-tuning correction width or more hasoccurred during control

Handling Precautions“Full scale” refers to the full extent of the range on the controller.

[Example] In the case of K thermocouple input of –200 to +400°CFull scale is 600°C and 10%FS is 60°C.• “Control by self-tuning” is PID time proportional control combined

with automatic tuning of the PID constants by self-tuning.• The more times that tuning is repeated, the more controllability of

self-tuning improves. We recommend combined use of self-tuningwith auto-tuning when calculating satisfactory controllability fromwhen the DMC10 starts to run.

The following settings and operations are required for performing self-tuning:1. Setting of the control method2. Self-tuning correction width3. Self-tuning up/down startup condition4. Time proportional cycle5. Time proportional control operation mode (when necessary)6. Auto-tuning startup (when calculating a satisfactory controllability from initial

running)

App.-1

App.-2

Description of related setting items• Self-tuning correction width

Of the self-tuning startup conditions, this is the startup condition width of self-tuning that is started up by occurrence of deviation. Self-tuning is started upwhen a deviation that exceeds this width occurs. When correction is set to “0”,self-tuning by deviation does not start up. Only startup by SP change isperformed.

• Self-tuning up/down startup conditionSet this parameter when setting startup only at PV rise (change of SP value in updirection) during self-tuning by SP change. Normally, setup is performed whenthe PV both rises and falls (change of SP value in down direction). However, thecontrol characteristics are markedly different during PV rise and fall, and thesetting is changed when controllability during PV fall is not required.(We recommend this setting, for example, when controlling an injectionmolding machine having high heat retaining properties.)

Handling Precautions• Self-tuning is not active at all times; it is active only when SP changes or

when a deviation of fixed value or more (self-tuning correction width ormore) occurs. In other states, control is performed using alreadydetermined control constants.

• If the power is turned OFF while self-tuning has started up, the tuningresult is not written to the controller. Whether or not self-tuning hasended can be verified on the PC loader’s monitor screen.

• Of the self-tuning startup conditions, tuning that is started up on deviationis not suitable for the following control targets:- Control targets that are adjacent to each other (up and down, left and

right) such as reflow chambers, dies and injection molding machinesand that are each influenced by fluctuations in PV

- Machinery that intermittently causes disturbance such as packingmachines.In this case, set the self-tuning correction width to “0”. This disablesstartup by self-tuning due to occurrence of deviation. Self-tuning isstarted up only when the SP changes.

Control by PID Fixed ValuesThis function allows the user to set PID values for control constants manually orby auto-tuning for performing control. Once control constants have been set, theydo not change as long as manual setting or auto-tuning is not performed.We recommend this control method in the following instances:• when the characteristics of the control target do not change even if the SP value

or work is changed• when disturbance in control due to fluctuation of these is no problem

The following settings are required for performing control by PID fixed value:• Setting of the control method• Setting of PID values, or startup of auto-tuning

NoteFor details on the disturbance response control (Quick-FiTTER), see page 8-13.This parameter is for suppressing overshoot when PV changes from down to upon control targets whose temperature repeatedly fluctuates in a fixed pattern.

Appendix

2. Advice on Events

BusesThe side connector is the terminal standardly provided on the back of DMC10 for

linking multiple units side by side.

The side connector contains: (1) power supply, (2) RS-485 line, (3) data bus input

for On/Off signal X 4, and (4) data bus output for On/Off signal X 4. Only

connecting via these connectors allows two or more number of DMC10 units the

mutual use of these functions.

This chapter describes the bus for On/Off signal.

Purpose of the bus signal transmitted via the side connector (On/Off signal transmission)This signal is used to notify the On/Off status of a specific DMC10 unit to other

DMC units or event modules. This function is useful when two or more number of

DMC10 units are used together.

Specifications for the bus signal transmitted via the side connector (On/Off signal transmission)In the DMC10 units connected via side connectors, the On/Off signal buses are

ORed.

Accordingly, if the bus output of any one instrument becomes ON, the inputs to all

the instruments are turned ON and finally the corresponding output relay of the

event module is turned ON.

App.-3

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4BUS OUT

BUS1 to 4

BUS IN

RSW BUS1 to 4

BUS 4

DMC10

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4BUS OUT

BUS1 to 4

BUS IN

RSW BUS1 to 4

DMC10

1 2 3BUS IN

EV1 to 4 output terminal

DMC10E

Side connectorSide connectorSide connector

Event output module

BUS 3

BUS 2

BUS 1

4

Appendix

Data transmittable via side connectors (On/Off signal transmission)See the sections following on the event output operation and event input operation:

Preparation for use of bus signals transmitted via side connectors(On/Off signal transmission)

The minimum settings to use this bus among two or more number of DMC10units are as follows:

1. Defining the signal output to the bus from each instrument

• Select "Event Special" on the "Special Function" screen of the loader.

• The "Event Assign" of loader will be additionally displayed in the menu. In

its settings, set the following items as required:

(a) Selecting the data to be output (multiple data items can be specified) ...

"Output Assign1" to "Output Assign3"

(b) AND/OR operation of selected items ... "Logic"

(c) Latching the results ... "Latch"

(d) Selecting the direct/reverse action ... "Polarity"

App.-4

2. Defining the processing of each instrument after receiving a signal from the

bus- Select "RSW Special" on the "Special Function" screen of the loader.

• The menu for "RSW input" of loader will be expanded. Set as required.

(a) Selecting the function to operate the DMC10 for the states of buses 1 to 4 ...

"RSW type"

(b) Selecting the PV channel to operate ... "Channel"

(c) Selecting the On/Off status to be used ... "Input Assign1" to "Input Assign3"

(d) OR/AND operation of input status ... "Logic"

(e) Reversing the input status ... "Polarity"

For details, see "Event output special operation" and "External switch input special

operation" on the following sections.

Device configuration and number of unit limitationsOnly one event output module DMC10E can be used in a linked group.When groups are wired from the base and not linked by the side connector asshown in the figure below, each group becomes an independent group, and a newDMC10E module can be used in that group.

Assignment of event bus outputs to D/IEvent bus outputs can be assigned to D/I internally as they are.

[Example]Switching from the RUN mode to the READY mode when a heater line breakoccurs is possible without outputting that change in state.

How to set “Event assign” and “RSW Input” on the loaderIn the basic function setup, the channel number is displayed on the horizontalaxis on the loader screen. However, by “Event Assign” and “RSW Input”, theevent output number (event bus output number) or external switch inputnumber are displayed on the horizontal axis.

Appendix

DMC10E DMC10E DMC10E

DMC10E DMC10E

RS-485 communications RS-485 communications

Two or more units cannot be used in the same group.

3. Event Output Special Operation

Internal Structure of Event Output Special Operation

Normal statusNormally, the action is set so that the results of operation for one event factor (one

event table X 8) are simply output to one fixed output port.

When the event output special operation is usedBy performing "various settings and operations for factor output" for each output

destination terminal, it is possible to freely select and perform operations on the

data to be output to the output terminals and side connector buses (total of 12

terminals).

App.-5

Appendix

Output destination terminal name (total of 12 terminals) Internal factor to be output (Factory settings) Remarks

Event terminal 1 (models with an event terminal only) Results of EV1




BUS1 (side connector) Results of EV BUS1




OUT1 Results of time proportional output operation (PVch1)




Output destination terminal name Various settings for output the factors via (total of 12 terminals) each of 12 terminals

Event terminal 1 (models with an event terminal only)Event terminal 2(models with an event terminal only)Event terminal 3 (models with an event terminal only)Event terminal 4 (models with an event terminal only)BUS1 (side connector)BUS2 (side connector)BUS3 (side connector)BUS4 (side connector)OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4

Available for

models with an

event terminal

only

Side connector

bus output

-

4-channel

models only

Factor selection (Multiple items selectable fromamong the following 40 types/factors)• EV TBLs 1 to 8• Event terminal outputs 1 to 4• RSWs 1 to 4• OUT 1 to 4 internal computation results• RSW TBL 1 to 8 internal computation results• RSW bus inputs 1 to 4• Communications DI1 to DI12

Logic (0: OR 1: AND) Polarity (0: Direct 1: Reverse) Latch (0: OFF 1: ON(latch in ON)

2: ON(latch in OFF)) External bus type definitions (0: relay

1: voltage/pulse), see page 8-30

App.-6

• The following are the outline of each factor:

• Every model is standardly equipped with 8 event tables including those without

event terminals. Consequently, it is possible to set up to 8 event states

individually and output them via the side connector bus or read the event states

through communications.

Block Diagram of Output Special Operation

Appendix

Factors available for output assignment

Information inside the product

States of time proportional outputs 1 to 4

Computation results of event TBLs 1 to 8

Information outside the product States of RSW

inputs 1 to 4 Computation

results of RSW TBLs 1 to 8

States of side connector buses 1 to 4

States of com-munications DI1 to DI12

Multiple items can be specified

Output assign1 to 3Selecting the output type












Logic0: OR1: AND

Latch0: OFF1: ON (latch in ON)2: ON (latch in OFF)

Polarity0: Direct1: Reverse

Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Side con-nector output

Output terminal

The output terminal varies according to the model.

BUS1

BUS2

BUS3

BUS4

EV1

EV2

EV3

EV4

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

OUT4












The types (factors) of outputavailable states(total of 40 types)EV TBL (event table) 1 to 8

Event terminal outputs1 to 4RSWs 1 to 4

OUT 1 to 4 computationresultsRSW TBLs 1 to 8 internalcomputation results

RSW bus inputs 1 to 4Communications DI1 to DI12

Descripiton

The results of internal computation on the event tables 1 to 8.This is the state of internal computation results before output to theterminal.The factor of event table uses the results computed with thefollowing parameters.• Event type, channel, polarity, standby, alarm OR action, event

setting value (main, sub), hysteresis, event action at Ready, ONdelay, OFF delay

Output state of event terminal.Available for models with an event terminal onlyStates of RSWs 1 to 4.Available for models with an optional RSW only.Computation results of time proportional output.This is the internal state before output to the terminal.The states set and used on the RSW TBLs 1 to 8.The factor of RSW table uses the results computed with thefollowing parameters.• RSW type, channel, logic, polarityThe state of side connector bus input signal.Bit state freely turned On/Off by being written through communications.

App.-7

Operating Procedures for Event Output Special OperationTo use an event output special operation, follow the procedures below. Event

output special operations do not operate without these settings.

The main steps are:

(1) Specify the use of event output special operation

(2) Set up the contents of the event action (event table)

(3) Set up the event table output destination and logical action

Detailed procedures are described below.

Setting procedures(1) Specify the use of event output special operation

In the PC loader, select [Setup] [Special Function], then check [EventSpecial] in the Special Function window.

The [Event Table] and [Event assign] items will appear under [Option] for

setting event details and assigning the output destination.

The separate window for event setting is called an [Event Table].

(2) Set up the event table

Select [Option] [Event Table] to open an event table as shown below and

set up the contents of the event action. Up to 8 event tables (from EV_TBL1 to

EV_TBL8) are available.

Appendix

App.-8

(3) Set up the event table output destination and logical action

Select [Option] [Event assign] and set up the output destination of the set

event table and the logical action.

1) Output destination

The names of the output destinations are displayed along the horizontal axis

of the screen. They include EV1, EV2, EV3, EV4, EV_BUS1, EV_BUS2,

EV_BUS3, EV_BUS4, OUT1, OUT2, OUT3 and OUT4 (some of these

may be unavailable for some DMC10 models).

2) Assigning the setup contents

With the cursor placed in the Output assign1 or Output assign2 row, select

[Edit] [Bit edit] and the following window will appear.

• Setup window with the cursor placed in the Output assign1 row

Appendix

Select the contents to be assigned here.( : Selected, : Not selected)

App.-9



The availability of Output assign1, Output assign2 and Output assign3 depends

upon the type of setup contents.

3) Logical action setup

When two or more setup items have been selected, specify AND or OR in

the Logic setup menu. If not specified, OR will be selected.


If it is necessary to change the Latch or Polarity setting, specify your

selection.

Appendix

4. External Switch Input Special Operation

App.-10

Appendix

Internal Structure of External Switch Input Special Operation• Normal status

Normally, the factor to switch the function of RSW is fixed as follows:

• When the RSW input special operation is used

It is possible to freely select the factors to switch the functions set in the RSWs

and perform OR/AND operations for them.

• Every model is standardly equipped with 8 RSW input tables including those

without external contact input. Consequently, it is possible to control the state

of an instrument for up to 8 items individually.

Input terminal name Available parameters Name of the RSW to be activated RemarksRSW input 1 • RSW type RSW1 Available for models with an RSW input 2 • Logic (0: OR 1: AND) RSW2 external terminal onlyRSW input 3 • Polarity (0: Direct 1: Reverse) RSW3RSW input 4 RSW4RSW bus input 1 RSW5 (RSW BUS1) Side connector event bus inputRSW bus input 2 RSW6 (RSW BUS2)RSW bus input 3 RSW7 (RSW BUS3)RSW bus input 4 RSW8 (RSW BUS4)

Selecting various factors to activate RSW functions Available parameters Name of the RSW to be activatedSelecting factors for RSW activation • RSW type RSW1(Multiple items selectable from • Logic (0: OR 1: AND) RSW2among the following 40 types) • Polarity (0: Direct 1: Reverse) RSW3• EV TBLs 1 to 8 RSW4• Event outputs 1 to 4 RSW5• RSW inputs 1 to 4 RSW6• OUT 1 to 4 internal computation results RSW7• RSW TBL 1 to 8 internal computation results RSW8• RSW bus inputs 1 to 4• Communications DI1 to DI12

App.-11

• Block diagram of input assignment

Input factors available for RSW input assignment States of RSWinputs 1 to 4 States of side con-nector bus inputs 1 to 4 Computation results of event TBLs 1 to 8 States of event output terminals 1 to 4 States of com-munications DI1 to DI12

Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


Logic0: OR1: AND


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Input assign1 to 3State type selection for switching

RSW function

RSW1 function RSW type Channel


RSW function



RSW function



RSW function



RSW function



RSW function



RSW function



RSW function


RSW TBL 1 to 8 internal computation results

Appendix

App.-12

Operating Procedures for RSW Input Special OperationIf you want to use the special operation of RSW input, set following the

procedures shown below. The RSW input special operation does not operate

without these settings.

Make settings following the steps below:

(1) Specifying the use of RSW input special operation

(2) Setting up the contents of RSW input action (RSW input table)

(3) Setting up the RSW input source and logical action

Detailed procedures are as follows.

Setting procedures(1) Specifying the use of RSW input special operation

On the PC loader, select [Setup] [Special Function], then check [RSWSpecial] on the Special Function window.

>> The contents of RSW input settings and the actual input are separated.

Moreover, the [Input assign1], [Input assign2], [Input assign3] and

[Logic] items are newly added to [RSW Input].The separated RSW setting unit is called an [RSW Input Table].The assignment of the RSW input table to the desired input source is

performed with [Input assign1], [Input assign2] or [Input assign3].(2) Setting up the contents of RSW input action (RSW input table)

Select [Option] [RSW Input] (shown below) to set up the contents of RSW

input action.

The setup contents of the RSW input tables (RSW_TBL1 to RSW_TBL8) are

displayed on the horizontal axis of the screen. Specify the desired "RSW type"

and "Channel".

Appendix

App.-13

(3) Setting up the RSW input source logical action

Specify the RSW input type to operate the setup contents of the RSW input

tables (RSW_TBL1 to RSW_TBL8) displayed on the horizontal axis using

[Input assign1], [Input assign2] or [Input assign3].With the cursor placed at the column of Input assign1 or Input assign2, select

[Edit] [Bit Input] and the below window will appear. Set up the desired

input type here.

1) Setting up the input type

Setup window with the cursor placed at the column of Input assign1

Select the contents to be assigned here.

( : Selected, : Not selected)

• Setup window with the cursor placed at the column of Input assign2

• Setup window with the cursor placed at the column of Input assign3


When two or more number of setup items have been selected, specify AND

or OR in Logic setting. If not specified, OR will be selected.

Appendix

App.-14

Sample Applications Combining the Event Output Special Operation and theRSW Special Operation

The sample applications are shown below. They are only a few cases among those

to be realized by combined settings of new functions. The widest range of

functions can be realized by setting event types, RSW functions and I/O conditions

(types, logical operations, polarity and latch) of buses, etc., freely as required.

ORing the event (alarm) results of multiple DMC10s and issuing an alarm• In a system composed of 15 DMC10 units with four channels each (total of up

to 60 PV channels) linked via side connectors, if either of deviation event state

(reverse action) and alarm event state (reverse action) has satisfied the event

generation condition in any one of the units, the event module will issue an

alarm.

ANDing multiple event (alarm) results (up to 8 points) in a DMC10 and issuing an alarm• Example: If the deviation of any channel is out of the range (this is determined

by the deviation event) and the PV has surpassed the preset value (this is

determined by the PV upper limit event), an On signal is issued to the bus. This

signal places all the other DMC10s linked to this unit in the Ready state (using

the external switch table).

ANDing the event results of multiple PV channels (up to 4 channels) in a DMC10 andissuing an alarm

• Example: An alarm is issued when the deviations of all the PV 1 to 4 channels

have reached the preset value (this is determined by the deviation event).

Programming with a simple time control• Example: If the deviations of all the PV 1 to 4 channels have reached the preset

value (this is determined by the deviation event), the SP set is automatically

changed (using the external switch input) after 120 seconds (using the event

ON/OFF delay) and the temperature rises to the next setting value.

With communications DIs, switching the states of up to 15 units X 4 channels DMC10s(Run/Ready state, for example) by sending the command only once

• Example: The On/Off state is transmitted to the communications DI1 of one

single DMC10 from the host computer over a communications line. This state

is output to the external bus and, responding to the state of this bus, the

Run/Ready states of all the linked PV channels change at the same time.

(Conventionally, it was needed to write the new setting to all the channels

individually by 60 times of transmission. Moreover, at least a delay of several

seconds was observed.)

Appendix

5. Setting When Heat/Cool Control Is Used (available for 2-channel model DMC10D only)

To use the heat/cool control function, it is necessary to select the advanced function 2-channel model DMC10D,

then set up the heat/cool control and output setting assignment.

For the applicable models, see "Configuration of DMC10S, DMC10D model numbers" on page 1-2.

Setting Procedures(1) Specifying the heat/cool control

On the PC loader, select [Option] [Special Function], then check

[Heat/Cool] on the Special Function window.

Handling PrecautionsIt is not allowed to use the heat/cool control together with the remoteSP control.

(2) Setting up the output assignment of heat/cool control

Select the types of heat/cool control output and cool control output.

Assignment is forcibly performed according to the setting contents.

As the output terminals, OUT1/OUT2 (control output terminals), EV3/EV4

(event output terminals) or AUX1/AUX2 (auxiliary output terminals) are used.

App.-15

Appendix

6. Settings When Remote SP Is Used (available for DMC10D only)

App.-16

Setting Procedures(1) Specifying the remote SP control

On the PC loader, select [Option] [Special Function], then check

[Remote SP] on the Special Function window.

In [PV Input] in the [Standard] menu, the input channel indication for remote

SP changes to RSP.

Handling PrecautionsIt is not allowed to use the remote SP control together with theheat/cool control.

Appendix

7. Settings When Inter-Channel Deviation Control Is Used (available for DMC10D only)

In the advanced function models, it is possible to use the control method where the inter-channel PV deviation is

used as an SP. This method is used by setting up so that the channels other than the master one perform the inter-

channel deviation control while the master channel performs the normal control.

Setting Procedures(1) Set up the items from 14 to 17 in [Control Output] in the [Standard] menu.

The following is a sample setting with the channel 1 as the master channel.

• 14: Differential control between channelSpecifying the differential control between channels is used or not.

(0: Used, 1: Not used)

• 15: Base channel for differential controlSpecifying the channel on the other end of the deviation to be set from among

the channels 1 to 4

• 16: Type of channel differential controlSpecifying either deviation from the following:

• Deviation from the PV of the channel on the other end: Normal selection

(when the PV value of the master channel is stable)

• Deviation from the SP of the channel on the other end: Select this when the

PV value of the master channel is unstable

(0: SP = PV of the specified channel + value of channel differential control,

1: SP = SP of the specified channel + value of channel differential control)

• 17: Value of channel differential controlSetting up the value of differential control

App.-17

Appendix

Revision History

Printed Manual Number Edition Revised pages DescriptionDate

Sep. 2000 CP-UM-5143E 1st Edition

July 2001 2nd Edition Overall revision

Sep. 2001 3rd Edition 10-18 Communications DI input (??) toCommunications DI input (1 to 12) changed.

10-29, 10-30 Input assignment1 to Input assignment2 changed,Input assignment2 to Input assignment1 changed.

Nov. 2001 4th Edition 1-2 Additional Processing of model numbers,D0:Provision of Inspection Sheet to

Inspection Cetificate provided changed,Y0:Traceability supported to

Complying with the traceability certification changed.

10-18 COMM1 to COMM12 added.

Feb. 2002 5th Edition 5-1 Note changed.7-2 Handling Precautions Item added.10-42 to 10-44 10-9 Detail Explanation on Communication Conditions

added.10-45 to 10-46 Section 10-9 to 10-10 changed,

Old 10-42 to 10-43 page.

Apr. 2002 6th Edition 8-17 30:Loop diagnosis 2 ON and OFF Delay added "00:00:00 to 99:59:59"

8-21 26:Deviatiob lower limit Illustrations changed

May 2002 7th Edition 11-2 (1) of •Checksum(LRC),It is (1) to (3) • • • • • • → It is (2) to (3) • • • • • • changed.

14-3 Range No. 31 to 34 of RTD PV input type/rangetable added.

Apr. 2003 8th Edition RESTRICTIONS ON USE changed.1-2 Note of l List of CMC10 related products added4-1 Description replaced between Event relay output

(CH1/2) and External switch input (CH1/2) of 2-channel model.

5-2 Handling Precautions Item added.8-1 Setting range of input type changed.8-15 Factory setting of channel targeted for LED

operation, 0:OR operation on all channels →1:channel1 changed.

8-30, 10-26 External bus definition added10-17, "H"added of Hex Item10-25 to10-27, 10-30 to 10-3211-1 Features Item 2 changed.14-1 Rated power voltage in Reference conditions →

Power voltage changed.14-6 Dotted line between AUX CH1 and AUX CH2

changed to solid line in the figure of “Isolation between inputs and outputs”.

App.-5 Description added of When the event output special operationused table

Aug. 2004 9th Edition Manual name changed.RESTRICTIONS ON USE changed.

4-5 Screw tightening torque changed.4-6 Connecting the Power Supply: Explanation

added to apply UL. Connecting for CPL Communications:Item added to Handling Precautions.


Aug. 2004 CP-UM-5143E 9th Edition 4-8 When connecting to a PGM10N/F (made byYamatake Corporation: Added. When connecting to a G3PA (made by Omron Corporation): G3NA deleted.

7-2 Operating system OS added.7-7 Menu screen changed.8-20 Item No.19: Explanation in the “direct action”

column changed.8-22 Alarm OR action: Explanation added.8-30 Latch: Description in the Setting Range” column

changed to “1: ON (latch in ON), 2: ON (latch in OFF)”.

8-32 Latch: Description in the “Description” column changed to “1: ON (latch in ON),2: ON (latch in OFF)”.

9-1 Position proportional control: “international branch control” deleted.

10-7 “Maximum number of read …..” changed to “Maximum number of write ….”“End code” changed to “Status code”.

10-8 to 10-11 Send message: “four or eight hexadecimal digits” changed to “four hexadecimal digits”.“End code” changed to “Status code”.

10-9 RAM area: “Up to 28 words” changed to “Up to 27 words”.

10-15 “RS-232C” changed to “RS-485”.10-16 to 10-29 Table revised. Old pages 10-16 to 10-32.10-27 Latch: Description in the “Data information”

column changed to “1:ON (latch in ON),2:ON (latch in OFF)”.

10-30 Items 6 and 7 for CH1 or CH2 motor adjustment error: Description changed. Old page 10-33.

10-31 to 10-42 Old pages 10-34 to 10-46.11-2 MODBUS ASCII: “The application layer” in the

description changed to “(3)”.11-3 MODBUS RTU: “The application layer” in the

description changed to “(2)”.11-4 Other Specifications: Data count “16(WRITE)”

in the table changed to “10(WRITE)”.12-5 Wiring diagram: “A” and “C” changed.14-1 Screw tightening torque: Description in the

“Specifications” column changed.14-4 “Load current” added. “Current output” deleted.App.-6, App.-7 Latch: Changed to “1:ON (latch in ON), 2:ON

(latch in OFF)”.

Mar. 2005 10th Edition 10-23 “Use of output branch control”:RAM address Hex “7903H” changed to “0F3F”,ROM address Decimal “0F3F” changed to “7903H”,ROM address Hex “1DEFH” changed to “1EDFH”.

10-29 “Data format”:ROM address Decimal “-” changed to “7802H”,ROM address Hex “-” changed to “1E7AH”.“Transmission speed”:ROM address Decimal “-” changed to “7803H”,ROM address Hex “-” changed to “1E7BH”.

14-2 PV Input:“Input type” added. “Reception resistance”: Max.50Ω changed to Max. 120Ω.


Nov. 2005 CP-UM-5143E 11th Edition 8-4 External switch input Type of action Setting Range No.13 and 14 changed.

10-33 Table 10-4 No.1 to 8 and No.9 to 16 Remarks added.Table 10-5 No.1 to 4 and No.5 to 8 Remarks added.

10-34 Table 10-6 No.1 to 4 Remarks changed.No.5 to 8 and No.9 to 12 Remarks added.

10-35 to 10-37 Table 10-8 to 10-13 title and remarks added.10-36, 10-37 Table 10-10, 10-12, 10-13 Value and Note

changed.10-38 Table 10-14 Item Communication DI5 to DI12→

DI1 to DI8 changed. No.9 to 12 Item changed.No.13 to 16 Value changed. Note changed.

13-3 Host Communications Related Trouble•No response in communicationsCause and Remedy 1 tem added.

App.-8 1) Output destination picture changed.

Mar. 2006 12th Edition 10-26, 10-27 Type of action of RSW1 to RSW4 and RSW bus1to RSW bus4: Item Data Infoemation 0 to 12 → 1to 14 changed.

Jan. 2007 13th Edition iii, iv System disk: Floppy disk chenged to CD-ROM.iii, 1-2 Model No: SLP-D10J20 chenged to SLP-D10J602-2, 3-2 DIN rail stopper chenged to DIN rail locking tab3-1 Mounting Locations: description of the 1st and 5th

item added.3-1, 3-2 Mount each DMC10 module vertically as in the

figure below added.7-2 Operating system: Windows95 deleted, Serial port

deleted, USB port added, Hardware configurationchanged.

7-3 Installing SLP-D10: (1) to (3) changed.7-6 to 7-9 Device Driver Installation for USB Loader

Cable added.7-10 to 7-22 Old pages 7-7 to 7-189-2 Time proportional power saving mode: branch

control chenged to deviation control10-24 3293 Data Inf.: 1:ON chenged to 1:1/2 Energy

saving, 2: 1/4 Energy saving10-25 3349: 0D15H: 7349: 1CB5H chenged to 3348:

0D14H: 7348: 1CB4H10-26 to 10-27 RSW1 to RSW4, RSWbus1 to RSWbus4: Data Inf.

1 to 14 chenged to 0 to 1414-2 PV Input: Reception resistance chenged to Input

Inpedance, Operation at a thermocouple input line break added to Can be changed by setting.

May 2007 14th Edition i SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Examples changed.iii, 1-2 SLP-D10J60 changed to SLP-D10J50.10-4 List of data link layer data definitions Character

code 0 to 07H changed to 0 to 0FH.10-16 Word Address Data Decimal point information

∆1 Added. Data information for RAM address 1028-1029 changed 1:AUTO to 0:AUTO, and changed 2:MANUAL to 1:MANUAL.


May 2007 CP-UM-5143E 14th Edition 10-16 Data Information for RAM addresses 1032–1033changed 1:RUN to 0:RUN, and changed 2:READY.Data Information for RAM addresses 1036–1037changed 1:LOCAL to 0:LOCAL, and changed 2:REMOTE to 1:REMOTE.

10-17 Item for RAM addresses 1052, 1055, 1058, 1061, 1064, 1067, 1070, 1073 changed (hours) to (minutes).

10-23 Item for 3231, 3232 added.Data information for RAM address 3235–3236 changed 1 to 6 to 3 to 30.

10-24 Data information for RAM address 3275, changed page 9-7 to page 9-6.Data Information for RAM addresses 3286–3289changed page 9-10 to page 9-6.About Zener Barrier Adjustment range 27, 28 added.

14-2 PV Input Allowable wiring resistance range 31,32, 33, 34 added.

Jan. 2008 15th Edition 10-18 Data information for RAM adress 1111-1114 added.

14-2 Allowable input voltage added.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Advanced Automation Company

1-12-2 Kawana, FujisawaKanagawa 251-8522 Japan

URL: http://www.azbil.com

Printed on recycled paper. (07)

Printed in Japan.1st Edition: Issued in July 2000 (R)

15th Edition: Issued in Jan. 2008 (A)

Documents

DMC10 Distributed Multi-channel Controller1].pdf · Chapter 7. LOADER This chapter describes how to operate the Smart Loader Package SLP-D10 exclusively for the DMC10. Chapter 8